JP2019103639A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing interest of a game.SOLUTION: Colors of V winning aura images 95A to 95E are changed (A to E) in a round number suggestion performance, according to the number of winning (1 to 10, etc.) to a V determination winning device in a small winning game state. Further, the game machine includes: first control means 90103 capable of executing a recovery process of the game state when receiving power supply after stopping power supply; display means 905 capable of displaying a promotion display for promoting shooting a game medium so as to flow down a specific path 9010R and a recovery display relating to the recovery process; notification means 9030 capable of performing promotion notification for promoting so as to flow down the specific path 9010R; and second control means 90120 for controlling display on the display means 905 on the basis of the information transmitted from the first control means 90103. The second control means 90120 is capable of controlling to display the recovery display and the promotion display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 20

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more particularly to a gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling the gaming machine in an advantageous state of giving a predetermined value to a player.

  As generally known game machines of this type, there have been machines which perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state or the like) which is advantageous for the player.

  Such a gaming machine is controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit gaming state etc.) based on the variable display result, and a specific area (V prize) in a variable winning means (for example, a second large winning opening etc) There has been a state in which game media (game balls) can enter in the mouth) and an advantageous state is controlled based on the game media entering in a specific area in the predetermined state (Patent Document 1). In this gaming machine, after a plurality of gaming media, such as ten, enter into the variable winning means, they are controlled to an advantageous state.

JP, 2014-236880, A (paragraph 0658 grade)

  However, in the prior art described above, since the number of the upper limit number enters the variable winning means in a predetermined state or is not controlled to an advantageous state until the opening time elapses, the progress of the game is delayed in the predetermined state Therefore, there was a risk that the interest of the game would decline.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

(1) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing variable display and controlling it to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state etc.) advantageous to the player,
Variable winning means that allows game media to enter in a predetermined state (such as the V judgment winning device 87),
A specific area (V prize area 870 or the like) provided in the variable winning means and to which game media can enter;
First state control means (microcomputer for game control 560, S305 to S307 in FIG. 10, etc.) for controlling to an advantageous state (such as a symbol jackpot) based on the variation display result,
Based on the variable display result, control is made to the predetermined state, and a gaming medium can enter (such as V winning) into the specific area in the variable winning means (small hit state etc.), and the specific in the predetermined state Second state control means (game control microcomputer 560, S308 to S310 in FIG. 10, S305 to S307 in FIG. 10) for controlling to the advantageous state (small hit via big hit etc.) based on the game medium having entered the area. Etc) and
A predetermined effect means (effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (such as an effect of displaying the V winning aura image 95 as the suggested number of rounds in FIG. 20) based on the game medium entering the specific area in the predetermined state Microcomputer (S842 to S844 in FIG. 26)),
In the predetermined state, a predetermined period (a period of repeating 0.1 second × 10 times of opening and closing of 1 second, etc.) has elapsed, or a predetermined number (10, etc.) of game media are in the variable winning means. Exit based on entering
The predetermined effect means changes the effect mode of the predetermined effect according to the number of game media entering the variable winning means after the game medium enters the specific area (as shown in FIG. 24, small hit The color of the V prize aura image 95 changes, etc., in the round number suggestion effect of FIG.
further,
A launcher capable of launching game media based on a player's operation (eg, a hit operating handle or a hit launching device);
The first control means (for example, CPU 90103) that can control the progress of the game and execute the game state recovery process (for example, Sa9041 to Sa9048 in the game control main process) when receiving the power supply after stopping the power supply. When,
A promotion display (for example, a right-handed notification image) for promoting firing of a game medium so as to flow down a specific channel (for example, right gaming area 9010R) of the flow-down paths for game media to flow down, and the recovery Display means (for example, effect display device 905) capable of displaying a recovery display (for example, a power failure recovery screen) regarding processing;
Informing means (for example, a right-handed informing LED 9030) capable of promoting informing to promote firing of a game medium so as to flow down the specific path, which is means different from the display means.
A second control for controlling display on the display unit based on information transmitted from the first control unit (for example, a right-handed notification LED lighting specification command in the embodiment and a game state specification command in the modification 1) Means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control),
Equipped with
The second control means can perform control to display the promotion display together with the recovery display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 58 and 60, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a right-handed notification process and a power failure recovery screen display A part that displays a power failure recovery screen and a right-handed notification image on the effect display device 905 by executing the processing).

  According to such a configuration, after the game medium enters the specific area, the effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed according to the number of game media that has entered the variable winning means, so that the fun of the game is improved by the effect be able to. Further, when the gaming state is restored, the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can be reduced.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
Entry notification effect means (small) to execute an entry notification effect (V prize notification in FIG. 20, etc.) for notifying that the game medium has entered the specific area when the game medium enters the specific area in the predetermined state In the processing during opening of S 808 of FIG. 19 in the hit effect, and the processing of displaying the V winning image 94 of FIG.
The predetermined effect means executes the predetermined effect in relation to the specific effect being executed (as shown in FIG. 20, when the V prize image 94 is displayed, the V prize aura image 95 is displayed, etc. ).

  According to such a configuration, the predetermined effect is executed in relation to the execution of the entry notification effect for notifying that the game medium has entered the specific area, so the effect of the game is further improved by the effect. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the number of game media that has entered the variable winning means (as shown in FIGS. 20 (A) to (E) and 23 (A), V). The winning aura image 95 can be changed gradually in color, such as white → blue → green → red → rainbow according to the number of winning on the V determination winning device 87).

  According to such a configuration, the effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise in accordance with the number of game media that has entered the variable winning means, so the game that has entered the effect mode of the predetermined effect and the variable winning means The player can be made to pay attention to the number of media.

(4) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
The above-mentioned advantageous state is selected from a plurality of types of advantageous states having different degrees of advantage (a plurality of types of hit types in FIG. 2, etc.)
The effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage of the advantageous state controlled based on the game medium entering the specific area in the predetermined state (FIG. 23B). As described above, according to the determined number of rounds of the big hit, the selection ratio of a plurality of types of effect patterns having different stepwise change patterns of the color of the V prize aura image 95 is different, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise in accordance with the degree of advantage of the advantageous state controlled based on the game medium entering the specific area in the predetermined state. By enabling the player to recognize the advantage of the advantageous state controlled based on the game medium entering the specific area, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by the effect.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
Hold storage means (microcomputer for game control 560, RAM 55, hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing information on variable display as hold storage information;
It further comprises prefetching determination means (microcomputer 560 for game control, S1215, S1225 of FIG. 11, etc.) for determining whether or not the variable display which has not been started yet is controlled to the advantageous state.
The predetermined effect means can change the effect mode of the predetermined effect to a specific mode on the basis of the holding memory information in the advantageous state being included in the hold memory means ([V prize image aura color [Modified example of performing on-hold series notification effect]] and the like).

  According to such a configuration, the effect aspect of the predetermined effect can be changed to the specific aspect based on the fact that the pending storage means includes the pending storage information in the advantageous state, so the pending state is advantageous for the pending storage means By making it possible for the player to recognize that the pending storage information is included, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by the effect.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on the following (6)-(13) is included in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. Conventionally, in the gaming machine, when power is again supplied after the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped, as disclosed in JP-A-2002-143523, a variable display (display means) is used. There has been a display indicating that the gaming state is a specific gaming state, together with the fact that recovery from the state where power is not supplied is restored (restoration of the gaming state). However, in the above-described gaming machine, when the gaming state is restored, it is not displayed on the variable display device (display means) which one of the plurality of paths through which the gaming medium can flow. , There was a problem that the player may be disadvantaged. In view of this point, there is a demand for provision of a gaming machine capable of reducing the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to (6) according to another aspect,
(6) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) capable of playing a game using gaming media (for example, gaming balls),
A launcher capable of launching game media based on a player's operation (eg, a hit operating handle or a hit launching device);
The first control means (for example, CPU 90103) that can control the progress of the game and execute the game state recovery process (for example, Sa9041 to Sa9048 in the game control main process) when receiving the power supply after stopping the power supply. When,
A promotion display (for example, a right-handed notification image) for promoting firing of a game medium so as to flow down a specific channel (for example, right gaming area 9010R) of the flow-down paths for game media to flow down, and the recovery Display means (for example, effect display device 905) capable of displaying a recovery display (for example, a power failure recovery screen) regarding processing;
Informing means (for example, a right-handed informing LED 9030) capable of promoting informing to promote firing of a game medium so as to flow down the specific path, which is means different from the display means.
A second control for controlling display on the display unit based on information transmitted from the first control unit (for example, a right-handed notification LED lighting specification command in the embodiment and a game state specification command in the modification 1) Means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control),
Equipped with
The second control means can perform control to display the promotion display together with the recovery display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 58 and 60, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a right-handed notification process and a power failure recovery screen display A part that displays a power failure recovery screen and a right-handed notification image on the effect display device 905 by executing the processing)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can be reduced when the gaming state is restored.

(7) The gaming machine according to (6) above,
The second control means can control the notification by the notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 58, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the processing of S90705 and S90708 to turn on the right-handed notification LED 9030) Part, or the part that performs the processing of S 907 11 and turns off the right-handed notification LED 9030),
Control is performed to display the promotion display on the display unit together with the recovery display based on the reception of the specific route notification execution command for executing the promotion notification by the notification unit from the first control unit (for example, As shown in FIG. 58, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines in the processing of S90704 and S90707 that there is reception of the LED lighting designation command for right-handed notification, the processing of S90705 and S90706 or S90708 and S90709 is executed, and right-handed A portion to start lighting of the notification LED 9030 and display of a right-handed notification image on the effect display device 905)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is not necessary to provide an individual command for displaying the prompting display on the display means, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of commands.

(8) The gaming machine according to (6) or (7) above,
The first control means can transmit a command to the second control means at transmission timings at predetermined time intervals (for example, in the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 43 by the CPU 103 every 2 ms) Execute command control processing (S9020) and send a command to effect control board 12 (CPU 90120 for effect control), it is a command different from the specific route notification execution command and notifies that the gaming state has been restored Send a recovery command (for example, a power failure recovery specification command) at the transmission timing at the same predetermined time interval as the specific route notification execution command (for example, right-handed in Sa 9046 and Sa 9048 of the game control main processing shown in FIG. Make transmission settings for the notification LED lighting specification command and the power failure recovery specification command, and play the same interrupt game By executing the command control processing in patronage timer interrupt process, the portion for transmitting the right-handed informing LED lighting specified command and the power interruption recovery designated command)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the display start time of the recovery display and the display start time of the promotion display are different, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such as the promotion display being missed.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (8),
A specific route corresponding light emitting unit (for example, a right-handed display unit 9025D), which is a unit different from the display unit and the notification unit and can notify by light that the route where the game medium should be fired is the specified route. Light emitting means (for example, the first special symbol display 904A, the second special symbol display 904B, the normal symbol display 9020, the first hold display unit 9025A, the second hold display unit 9025B, and the common view hold display unit 9025C) Equipped
The first control means is capable of controlling light emission and extinguishment of the light emitting means, and a specific route notification execution command for starting the promotion notification in the notification means in conjunction with the light emission control of the specific route corresponding light emitting unit While performing control to transmit (for example, the right-handed LED lighting specification is specified in the processing of Sa 9046 and Sa 9047 of the game control main processing shown in FIG. 42 by CPU 90103 and the processing of S90302 and S90303 of big hit opening pre-processing shown in FIG. The command transmission setting is performed, and the right-handed display unit 9025D is turned on, and the specific route notification execution command for ending the promotion notification in the notification unit is transmitted along with the turn-off control of the specific route corresponding light emitting unit. Of the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. In the processes of 90196 and S90197, S90316a and S90316b of the big hit end process shown in FIG. 52, and the processes of S90251 and S90252 of the small hit end process shown in FIG. , Part to turn off the right-handed display part 9025D)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission state of the specific route corresponding light emitting unit and the promotion notification in the notification unit become interlocked, the promotion notification in the notification unit can be appropriately performed.

(10) The gaming machine according to (6) above,
Control is performed to display the promotion display on the display unit together with the recovery display based on the reception of the recovery command notifying that the gaming state has been restored from the first control unit (for example, in the first modification) As shown, the part for displaying the power failure recovery screen and the right-handed notification image on the effect display device based on the gaming state specified from the power failure recovery designation command received by the CPU 90103 as the effect control CPU 90120)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is not necessary to provide an individual command for displaying the prompting display on the display means, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of commands.

(11) The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (10),
The game medium can be changed to a first state (for example, closed state) in which the game medium can not win or difficult to win and a second state (for example, open state) in which the game medium is easier to win than the first state. Variable winning devices (for example, a first special variable winning ball device 907A and a second special variable winning ball device 907B) provided on a specific route;
A game value giving unit capable of giving a predetermined game value based on that the game medium has won the variable winning device (for example, in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 43 by the CPU 90103, the winning ball processing (S9012) Part to run),
Equipped with
The first control means is capable of controlling the variable winning device to the second state in the advantageous state, and the variable winning is achieved when the gaming state recovered by the first control means is the advantageous state. A display to the effect that the device changes to the second state can be displayed (for example, the effect display CPU 905 performs the process of S90625 of the power failure recovery screen display process shown in FIG. The part that displays the image while the big winning opening is open)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable winning device changes to the second state in which the game medium can be won when the gaming state is restored, thereby reducing the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can do.

(12) The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (11),
And an abnormality determination unit capable of determining an abnormality corresponding to a plurality of types of events having different priorities (for example, a portion that executes abnormality determination processing in which the CPU 90103 determines the occurrence of each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. ,
When the abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination unit, the notification is ended when the priority of the determined abnormality is higher than the priority of the abnormality being notified, and the notification about the determined abnormality is performed. Abnormality notification means (for example, when an error having a higher priority than an error being notified is determined in S90407 of the main side error processing, if the game stop flag is not set, an error with a high priority error The error notification process executed by the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control substrate 9012 of the effect control substrate 9012 by transmitting the designated command to the effect control substrate 9012 is an error notification in which an error notification of an error with high priority is already executed. A part to execute instead of
The state control means (for example, the CPU 90103 prohibits the firing of the game ball in S90411 and controls the game to stop) in accordance with the judgment of abnormality by the abnormality judgment means based on the judgment of abnormality Part),
Equipped with
When a new event corresponding to an abnormality occurs when the state controlled by the state control means is a predetermined state (for example, a game stop state in which a game stop flag is set), the abnormality notification means Continues the notification of the abnormality that triggered the control of the predetermined state regardless of the priority of the abnormality (for example, in S90407 of the main side error processing, an error with higher priority than the error in the notification) If it is determined that the game stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 does not transmit the error designation command of the high priority error to the effect control board 9012. Part that continues to notify the already running error without executing the error notification of the high priority error)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent that the event that is triggered to be controlled to the predetermined state becomes difficult to confirm.

(13) The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (12),
The second control means can display a plurality of options (for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (B) as the second modification, the effect display device 905 can be outputted from the speakers 908 L and 908 R during a big hit game) A part that displays multiple options for each BGM),
When any one of the plurality of options is selected, the display of the plurality of options is ended, and control execution means for executing control according to the selected options is provided (for example, a modification) As shown in Example 2, the player or the like selects one of the options by the operation of the push button 9031 B or the stick controller 9031 A and performs the determination operation, whereby the display of the image shown in FIG. 66B is ended. , Display of an image as a big hit game effect on the effect display device 905, and a portion where BGM corresponding to the determined option is output from the speakers 908L and 908R),
The control execution means executes control according to a predetermined one of the plurality of options when power supply is resumed when power supply is stopped while displaying the plurality of options (for example, As shown in the second modification, when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped in a state where it is not determined which BGM to output yet, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is reactivated. Of the options displayed in FIG. 66 (B), the BGM of 1 (the song C in this modification 2) is determined as the BGM to be output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the speakers 908L and 908R of the determined BGM are selected. To start output of)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when power supply is stopped in a state where a plurality of options are displayed, regardless of which of the plurality of options is selected, when power supply is resumed, Since the control according to the predetermined option is executed, the processing can be reduced.

  The present invention may have only the invention-specifying matters described in the claims of the invention, and has configurations other than the invention-specifying matters together with the invention-specifying matters described in the claims of the invention. It may be something.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure showing a hit classification table. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of a main board (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit determination table and a big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a change of the 1st, 2nd special symbol in a 1st time short state. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows small hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit open process. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a display screen figure of the presentation display apparatus which shows the presentation image of a round suggestion presentation. It is a display screen figure of the effects display apparatus which shows the effect image of pending | holding series alerting | reporting effects. It is a timing chart of reservation series reporting production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data table used when selecting the production | presentation aspect of round number suggestion production. It is an explanatory view showing a reservation series notification presence or absence determination table. It is a flowchart which shows pending ream / round number suggestion production selection processing. It is a flow chart which shows number-of-rounds suggestion production processing. It is a flow chart which shows pending reservation information production first processing. It is a flow chart which shows pending reservation information production second processing. It is a display screen figure of an effect display apparatus which shows the effect image of V combo effect. It is production | presentation explanatory drawing explaining V lamp reservation series alerting | reporting production | presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a holding | queuing series alerting | reporting performance execution presence / absence decision table, and a holding alerting effect kind selection table. It is an explanatory view showing a V combo effect type selection table. It is a figure which shows the V combo production | presentation pattern selection table used in order to select the production | presentation pattern of V combo production in 1st character production. It is a front view showing a game machine in an example. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a pachinko game machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates a production control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a change pattern. (A) is an explanatory view showing a display result determination table, (B) is an explanatory view showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), (C) is a big hit type determination table (second special symbol (D) is an explanatory view showing a small hit classification determination table, and (E) is an explanatory view showing contents of various jackpots. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data control area for game control. It is a front view which shows the structure of a 2nd special variable winning prize ball device. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main side error process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the priority of various errors and error, cancellation | release conditions, etc. FIG. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting aspect of an error. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of small hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit open process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of small hitting end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of right-handed notice processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a power failure restoration screen display process. It is a figure which shows the display mode at the time of restoring from vibration detection 1 error detection in a normal state. It is a figure which shows the display mode when it recovers from vibration detection 1 error detection in a small hit gaming state. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process according to Modification 1. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of right-handed notice processing in modification 1. It is a flow chart which shows an example of electric power failure restoration screen display processing in modification 1. It is a figure which shows the display mode and the output mode of BGM when it recovers from the power failure in BGM selection of a big hit game.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be another gaming machine such as a coin gaming machine.

  FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from the front. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape, a game frame (not shown) attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and an openable and closable game frame And a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame is a striking ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. In the lower part of the ball supply tray 3, an extra ball receptacle 4 for storing gaming balls as game media which can not be accommodated in the ball supply tray 3, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from the ball striking device as a batting ball A hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 to be operated is provided. At the back of the glass door frame 2, a game board 6 having a game area 7 in which the entered game balls can flow is formed detachably. In the game area 7, a large number of game nails are implanted. In the game area 7, a part of game nails of the game nails is shown. The ball striking device is driven by a firing motor, and the force (firing intensity) to launch the game ball is adjusted in accordance with the rotational operation position of the ball striking handle 5. Thereby, the player can shoot the game ball aiming at a desired place in the game area 7.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 capable of fluctuating display (also referred to as variable display) of effect symbols as plural types of identification information capable of identifying each of them is provided. In the game area 7, the first path of the flow-down paths in which the game balls flow down is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the effect display device 9 as viewed from the front, and the first of the flow-down paths in which the game balls flow A second path different from one path is mainly provided in the area on the right side of the effect display device 9 when viewed from the front.

  Hitting the game ball into the left area (left game area) of the effect display device 9 in order to cause the game ball to flow down to the first path is called left hitting. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the effect display device 9 to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is called right-handed. The first path may be called a left-handed path, since the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the left side of the game area 7. Further, since the second path is a path where the game balls can flow down by hitting the game balls on the right side of the game area 7, the second path may be called a right-handed path.

  The first route and the second route may be configured by different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The left game area and the right game area may be divided, for example, by the end face of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, the arrangement of game nails, or the like.

  The game balls fired from the ball hitting and launching apparatus in response to the operation of the ball hitting operation handle 5 and driven into the game area 7 are guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example, when guided to the left game area This makes it impossible or impossible to guide the right game area. In addition, when the gaming ball is guided to the right gaming area, for example, by being guided along the arrangement of the gaming nails, it becomes impossible or impossible to guide the left gaming area.

  A first start winning opening 13 is provided as a structure to which the game ball divided into the left game area of the game area 7 can enter. The first start winning opening 13 is disposed below the effect display device 9. The first start winning opening 13 is provided therein with a first start winning opening switch 13a as a switch for detecting an entered gaming ball.

  A gate 32, a variable winning ball device 15, and a V-determination winning device 87 are provided as a structure to which the gaming ball divided into the right gaming region of the gaming region 7 can enter. The variable winning ball device 15 has a second start winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball. In addition, as a switch for detecting the game ball which has entered into each, the gate switch 32a inside the gate 32, the second start winning opening switch 14a inside the second starting winning opening 14, V judgment winning device A V winning switch 87a, a V determination winning switch 15a, and a V determination discharge switch 15b are provided in the inside of 87, respectively. Hereinafter, winning (entry) of the gaming ball in the first starting winning opening 13 is also referred to as first starting winning, and the winning of the gaming ball in the second starting winning opening 14 (second entering) is also referred to as second starting winning.

  The game ball (start winning ball) enters as a start winning device for starting variable display (variable display) of the first special symbol as the variable display means (variable display means) in the first start winning hole 13 ) A possible winning opening structure. The second start winning opening 14 is a start winning device for starting variable display (variable display) of the second special symbol as a variable display means (variable display means), and a game ball (start winning ball) enters (prize) ) A possible winning opening structure.

  The gate 32 is a gate structure through which game balls can enter (pass). When the gaming ball passes through the gate 32, a normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The ordinary symbol will be described later. In the left game area, game nails are implanted so that the game ball is guided to the first start winning opening 13 of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to bring the game ball into the first start winning opening 13, the player may hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right game area, the game nails are implanted so that the game balls are induced to the second starting winning opening 14 and the gate 32 among the winning opening structures. Therefore, when aiming to bring the game ball into the second start winning opening 14 and the gate 32, the player may hit the game ball right.

  In addition, although there may be a possibility that the game ball divided into the right game area may enter into the first start winning opening 13, from the point of view of the playability, the possibility is divided into the left game area It is desirable to make the game balls extremely low compared to the possibility of entering them. Conversely, there may be a possibility that the game ball divided into the left game area may enter the gate 32 and the second start winning opening 14, but from the viewpoint of game play, the possibility is right It is desirable to make it extremely low compared with the possibility that the game ball divided into the game area may enter into them.

  The V determination winning device 87 is a device for determining a V winning of a game ball which is a condition for generating a big hit when a small hit occurs.

  The V determination winning device 87 is formed of a transparent member, and it is possible to visually recognize how the game ball passes inside. The V determination winning device 87 is provided at the top with a width through which the game ball can pass in the front and rear direction, and walls on both sides (front side and back side) of the passage inclined from right to left and extending in the left and right direction A section is provided, and a guiding path is formed along which the gaming ball is guided. In the middle part of the conduit, when a small hit occurs, over a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds × 10 open periods + 1 second closed period (interval period) × 9 times + end period 1 second) By repeating opening and closing, an operating opening is formed as an opening through which a total of about 10 or more gaming balls can be won within a predetermined period of opening. In the passage of the gaming ball in the V determination winning device 87, a projection as a decelerating means for decelerating the gaming ball to be guided is provided in a plurality of alternately projecting manner on both sides of the wall, A structure (hereinafter referred to as a deceleration structure) is formed such that the game ball slowly flows in the passage above the operation opening of the upper part of the V determination winning device 87.

  In the small hit gaming state, until the entry of ten gaming balls into the V determination winning device 87 is detected, or for a relatively long time until the predetermined period elapses, Release control is performed. During such an open control period, as in the case of the number-of-rounds suggestion effect shown in FIG. 20 described later and the hold-on notification effect shown in FIG. Specific effects are feasible. In the V determination winning device 87, a portion of the induction passage where no operation port is formed forms a fixed passage called a fixing portion 873. At a position where the operation port can be opened and closed, a movable portion 872 capable of moving forward and backward in the front-rear direction on the operation port is provided.

  The movable portion 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and is capable of advancing and retracting to open and close the operation port. In the state where the operation opening is closed by the state of the movable portion 872, the gaming ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable portion 872 and the fixed portion 873 as a guiding path, and the guiding path is guided from the right end to the left end and falls from the left end Do. In the state where the operation opening is opened by the operation state of the movable portion 872, since the operation opening is opened in the induction passage, the gaming ball guided to the induction passage can be dropped into the V determination winning device 87 from the operation opening. Become.

  Inside the V determination winning device 87 (operation opening), the V winning region 870 as a specific region is the center in the horizontal direction at the bottom of the V determination winning device 87 as a winning region in which the game ball entered from the operation opening can win. A ramp 871 is provided in the unit to further guide all of the gaming balls entered from the actuation opening onto the V pay area 870 by a sloping path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning opening through which game balls can enter, and can guide the game ball entering from the V winning opening downward.

  At the uppermost end of the winning opening (V winning opening) of the V winning area 870, an open / close member (not shown) in a plate state capable of switching the V winning area 870 to either the open or closed state is provided There is. The opening and closing member is driven by the solenoid 24, and can move forward and backward for opening and closing the V winning opening. In the state where the V winning opening is opened due to the state of the opening and closing member, the gaming ball guided on the V pay area 870 can fall into the V pay area 870. On the other hand, in a state in which the V winning opening is closed due to the state of the opening and closing member, the gaming ball guided onto the V winning area 870 passes over the opening and closing member and opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870 , And can be dropped into a winning ball area (not shown) capable of guiding the game downward.

  Specifically, the V prize area 870 of the V determination prize device 87 is basically in the open state, and in the small hit gaming state in which the operation port of the V determination prize device 87 is opened, one gaming ball is When entering into the V pay area 870 and winning, the gaming ball is detected by the V pay switch 15 a provided in the V pay area 870. In the small hit gaming state, when one game ball is detected by the V prize switch 15a, the open / close member is controlled to be in the closed state, and the game ball guided onto the V prize area 870 thereafter is within the prize ball area. You will enter the The game ball entering into the winning ball area is detected by the V determination winning switch 15b provided in the winning ball area. As a result, one game ball is detected by the V prize switch 15a, and a game ball after that is detected by the V decision winning switch 15b.

  When the total number of balls detected by the V prize switch 15a and the V prize switch 15b reaches 10, the operation port is closed and the game ball enters when the V-hit device 87 opened in the small hit gaming state reaches 10 It is considered impossible. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge at the lower side, and the gaming ball having entered the V determination winning device 87 through the merged discharge path is a predetermined one inside the game board 6. It is discharged to the discharge channel. The discharge passage is provided with a V-determination discharge switch capable of detecting a game ball to be discharged, and all the game balls discharged by the switch are detected.

  When a small hit occurs and the operation port of V determination winning device 87 is opened, the gaming ball is won in V prize region 870 and is detected by V prize switch 87a during a predetermined effective period The jackpot generation condition is established, and the jackpot game state is controlled. Such winning of the game ball in the V winning area 870 is called V winning. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as described above, during a period when a small hit occurs and the operation port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened, a total of about 10 game balls on average, without requiring special operations. Is designed and designed to allow V to enter V determination winning device 87. Furthermore, when the game ball is allowed to enter into V determination winning device 87, the game ball is always (100%) V winning area The structural design is made to enter 870. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a right-handed acceleration notification instructing a right-handed is executed so that the player can easily hit the gaming ball into the V determination winning device 87 when a small hit occurs. Ru.

  Therefore, when a small hit occurs, if the player does not fire the game ball during the opening period of the operation opening of the V determination winning device 87, and if the player does a left hit, the player can not go to the right For example, a game ball (100%) always enters the V pay area 870 and a big hit occurs.

  In this embodiment, the V judgment winning device 87 is provided with a deceleration structure of the gaming ball. However, without providing such a deceleration structure, an operation port which allows the game ball to be dropped to a part of the guiding path of the game ball in the V determination winning device 87 is provided during the small hit gaming state In order to cause about 10 game balls to enter the V pay area 870, the operation opening may be opened ten times.

  At a part of the front side of the V determination winning device 87, a V lamp 875, which is a light emitter made of an LED formed in a character shape of "V", is provided. The V lamp 875 is basically emitted in white when a V winning occurs in the small hit gaming state. For example, although the V lamp 875 can emit light basically in white, the emission color can be changed to blue, red, and iridescent depending on the presentation according to the game situation, as in the case of notifying the holding station. It is. The V lamp 875 may be provided on the front of the V determination winning device 87 or may be provided inside the V determination winning device 87 as long as the V indicator 875 can be viewed by the player. Further, V lamp 875 may be provided at a position different from V determination winning device 87 (for example, a position near V determination winning device 87, etc.).

  The variable winning ball device 15 changes into a state advantageous to the player who can enter the game ball (open state) and a state to which the player unable to enter the game ball is disadvantageous (closed state) As an accessory, and provided with tulip-shaped open wing pieces (a pair of left and right shapes) at the inlet portion, and a stopper member for limiting the entrance of the game ball in the closed state is provided above the open wing pieces. It is done. The open blade is driven by a solenoid 16. The variable winning ball device 15 changes from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state for the player by opening for a fixed period (for example, one second) when the display result of the normal symbol is hit. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win). Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  In the right game area, the game nails are implanted so that the game balls are induced to the variable winning ball device 15 and the V-determination winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to cause the game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 15 and the V-determination winning device 87, the player may hit the game ball right.

  Although it may be possible that the game ball divided into the left game area may enter either of the variable winning ball device 15 or the V-judge winning device 87, from the viewpoint of playability, It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared to the possibility that game balls defeated in the right game area may enter them.

  Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 capable of performing various effect displays such as effects corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is provided. A first special symbol display for variably displaying the first special symbol as a variation display means for variably displaying special symbols as plural types of identification information capable of identifying each on the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7 And a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying a second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each.

  Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is configured by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 9 is configured of a liquid crystal display device (LCD). On the display screen of the effect display device 9, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, various images such as variable display of the effect symbol as plural types of identification information capable of identifying each are displayed A display area is provided. In such a display area, for example, a symbol display area (symbol display area) that variably displays three decorative (for decoration) effect symbols (also called decorative symbols) for "left", "middle" and "right". Is formed.

  Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is controlled by the game control microcomputer mounted on the main board (game control board). The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the fluctuation display, and the second special symbol display 8b is performed by the first special symbol display 8a. (2) When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, if the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are generically referred to as a special symbol indicator (variation indicator) There is something to do.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may have only one special symbol display. When only one special symbol display is provided, only one start winning opening may be provided. Also, even if only one special symbol display is provided, two (a plurality of) start winning openings are provided, and even when the game ball is won in any of the start winning openings, one special symbol indicator is displayed. It may be controlled to display variable. In addition, when two special symbol indicators are provided (plural), one start winning opening is provided, and two special symbol indicators are variably displayed in a predetermined order (for example, they are variably displayed for each start prize) Special symbol display may be switched, etc.).

  Below the gaming area 7, a big hit variable winning ball device 20 is provided. In the big hit variable winning ball apparatus 20, the game ball hit to the right is induced by the game nail implanted in the right game area. In addition, the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is configured such that the game ball does not enter from the left game area according to the placement state of the game nail.

  The big hit variable winning ball device 20 has a big winning opening covered with a rectangular front door, and when a big hit occurs, the solenoid 21 tilts the door forward about the bottom by the solenoid 21 and the big winning opening appears (Open). Inside the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a count switch 23 for detecting an entered gaming ball is provided. To the big hit variable winning ball device 20, the winning route is made by the game nail and other structures so that the winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening becomes possible only when the gaming ball is hit in the right gaming area. It is restricted. In addition, even when the game ball is hit in any of the left gaming area and the right gaming area, it may be possible to win a prize winning opening.

  When a game ball is won in any of the first start winning opening 13, the second start winning opening 14, the big hit variable winning ball device 20, and the V-test winning device 87, a predetermined number of winning balls are determined accordingly. Is paid out. It is to be noted that the winning balls may be paid out even when the game balls pass through the gate 32. In addition, at least one of the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14, the winning balls may not be paid out even if the gaming balls are won.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. In the upper left and right upper and lower left of the game area 7, four speakers 27 are provided for producing sound effects and sounds as a predetermined sound output. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  Big hit is when the big hit symbol (big hit display result) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol (big hit display result) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Occurs in When it is determined that a big hit is made by a lottery based on the winning of the game ball in the first start winning opening 13, a big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a. When it is determined that a big hit is made by a lottery based on the game ball having won a prize in the second start winning opening 14, a big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b.

  A big hit is also generated when the gaming ball that has entered when the operation port of the V determination winning device 87 is open by entering the small hitting gaming state enters the V prize region 870. Hereinafter, the fact that the game ball enters the V pay area 870 and is detected by the V pay switch 87a is referred to as a V pay. A small hit is a hit where the operation port of the V determination winning device 87 opens as a predetermined value assignment, and a big hit can be generated on condition of the V winning. In the V determination winning device 87, the gaming state in which the operation port is opened is referred to as "small hitting gaming state". Then, in the small hit gaming state, the big hit generated based on the game ball having won the V is called "a big hit via a small hit". On the other hand, to be in the big hit gaming state based on the display result of the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is referred to as "big hit by special symbol".

  The jackpot gaming state is a specific gaming state (advantagement state) advantageous to the player as predetermined value assignment, and repeated continuous control is performed in which the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 repeats an open state and a closed state a predetermined number of times. A state in which the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened (the big winning opening is opened) in the repeated continuous control is called a round. Repeated continuation control is also called round control.

  In the jackpot gaming state, after the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is opened, a predetermined open state ending condition (in the open state for a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) It is closed in response to the fact that the open end condition that the (a) winning ball is generated is established. Then, when the open end condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated, and the big hit variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the jackpot gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round) where the predetermined upper limit is reached.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition (the first execution condition) or the second start condition (the second execution condition) which is the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, the game ball is After passing (including winning) the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 as a start winning area, the start condition of the variable display (for example, the change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is started based on the fact that the display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed), and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed when the fluctuation display time (variation time) has elapsed. Do. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate in advance, and includes the concept that the gaming ball has entered the winning opening (winning). It is. In addition, deriving and displaying the display result means that the symbol (example of the identification information) is finally stopped (fixed display).

  In addition, within the range of the predetermined upper limit number about the fluctuation indication where the start condition has not been satisfied yet despite the game ball entering the start area like the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 Storing information on the variable display for which the start condition has not yet been established is called pending storage. Also, the term such pending storage is also used to indicate (identify) information stored pending. Pending storage is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning storage.

  For the first special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the first hold storage as the hold storage based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first start winning opening 13. For the second special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the second hold storage as the hold storage based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 14. If a big hit occurs in the presence of such a first pending storage or a second pending storage, the pending storage existing before the occurrence of the big hit is maintained as it is, and the variation display is displayed after the end of the big hit gaming state Used for

  When the second start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs, even if there is a retention memory of the first start winning, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the second start winning takes precedence over Be done. Thus, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed prior to the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Above the first special symbol display 8b and the second special symbol display 8b, a second display consisting of a single display for displaying the number of activated winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, ie, the second reserved storage number A special symbol hold storage indicator 18b is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b lights the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b each time there is an effective start winning, and whenever variable display on the second special symbol indicator 8b is started, The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b is turned off.

  Above the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b, the first special symbol hold storage display consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of activated winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, ie, the first hold storage number A vessel 18a is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, an ordinary symbol display 10 for variably displaying an ordinary symbol capable of identifying each of the effect display devices 9 is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of fluctuating display of the numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Moreover, the small display is formed, for example, in a square shape.

  When the gaming ball passes through the gate 32, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), it is hit, and the variable winning ball device 15 is closed for a predetermined time from the disadvantageous closing state for the player. It changes to an advantageous open state for the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 32, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 increases the number of LEDs to be lit by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  Attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a stick controller 122 which can be held by the player and tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). In the stick controller 122, while the player holds the operating stick of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand), a predetermined instructing operation is performed by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, forefinger etc.) The trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the operating rod of the stick controller 122 to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button 125 (see FIG. 3). Is built-in. In addition, a tilting direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod is provided in the inside of the main body of the lower tray at the lower part of the stick controller 122 or the like. In addition, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

  On the member forming the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by the player or the like. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 120 is provided in the inside of the main body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 120 or the like.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, depending on the game situation, the game balls are shot by firing the game ball so as to selectively use the “left strike” aiming at the left gaming area and the “right strike” aiming at the right gaming area. The gaming state and the rendering state are controlled so that a rich game can be enjoyed. The flow of the game after the player starts the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

  When the player is seated on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starts the game for the first time, the player plays the game so that the game ball wins the first starting winning opening 13 by left hitting. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is a big hit (a big hit with a special symbol), the left hit is switched to the right hit, and a game is played aiming at the big hit variable winning ball device 20 opened. . After the big hit gaming state ends, a right strike promotion notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9, which urges the player to play the game by a right strike. Specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 9, a display such as "Aim for the right" is performed.

  During the jackpot gaming state, the player plays a game aiming at the opened jackpot variable winning ball apparatus 20 by right-handling. During the jackpot gaming state, a right strike promotion notification is performed. After the end of the jackpot gaming state, if it becomes a time saving state to be described later, continue to play the game by hitting the right. After the end of the big hit game, if the time saving state is reached, a time short notification notifying that the time saving state is started is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9. Also, during the time saving state, a right-handed acceleration notification is also performed. If it does not become a time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state, the right hitting promotion notification executed during the big hitting gaming state ends, switching from right hitting to left hitting and the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 Play the game as you do. It should be noted that if the time saving state is not achieved, a left strike promotion notification (also referred to as a left strike notification) is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to urge the player to hit back and play the game. May be

  During the time saving state after the end of the big hit game, the game is played by aiming at the variable winning ball device 15 having the second start winning opening 14 by right hitting. If the game ball is won in the second start winning opening 14 and the display result is a big hit (a big hit with a special symbol), the game is aimed at the big hit variable winning ball device 20 with a right hit. In addition, if the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14 and the display result is the small hit display result, the operation port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened in the small hit gaming state, so the right hit V Aim to play the determination winning device 87. At the start of the small hit gaming state, a small hit start notification for notifying that the small hit gaming state is started on the screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. In addition, when being controlled to the small hitting game state, according to the small timing (according to the game situation, depending on the game situation, according to the small hit it is executed before the operation opening of V decision winning device 87 is opened At the start timing of the hit display, or at a predetermined timing before the small hit display is performed, the right-handed acceleration notification is also performed.

  When the operation opening of the V determination winning device 87 is open due to the small hitting gaming state, the gaming ball falls from the operation opening into the inside of the V determination winning device 87 and enters the V winning region 870 and is detected, When a V prize occurs, a big hit via a small hit occurs. When the V winning is generated, a V winning notification is performed to notify that the V winning has occurred on the screen of the effect display device 9. Further, at the end of the small hit gaming state, a small hit end notification for notifying that the small hit gaming state has ended on the screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. Then, after the small hit is finished, the big hit gaming state is reached and the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened, so the player aims to play the big hit variable winning ball device 20 with the right hit.

  In the small hit gaming state, when aiming at the V determination winning device 87 and performing a game, the gaming ball does not enter the V winning region 870 and enters the non-specific region 871 other than the V winning region 870, There is no big hit. As described above, when the V winning is not generated during the small hit gaming state, a V winning failure notification is issued on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the V winning has failed. Further, at the end of the small hit gaming state, a small hit end notification for notifying that the small hit gaming state has ended on the screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. And, after the small hitting game state ends, when the time saving state continues, the player continues aiming at the variable winning ball device 15 while playing the right and plays the game. When the time saving state ends, the game is played so that the game ball is won in the first start winning opening 13 by switching from right hitting to left hitting. At the end of the time saving state, a time short end notification of notifying that the time reduction has ended on the screen of the effect display device 9, and a left hitting promotion notifying of prompting the player to play back on the left are performed.

  FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a hit type table. The hit type table shows, for each hit type, a big hit condition, a big hit control state (playing state), a big hit opening number (round number), and a big hit opening time of each round. In this embodiment, as a big hit per type, pattern 15R time short hit, pattern 4R time short hit, small hit via 16 (15) R time short hit, small hit via 9 (8) R time short hit, and small hit via 5 ( 4) R time short jackpot is provided. The number in the parenthesis of the big hit via the small hit indicates the number of times the big hit variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened.

  The small hit occurs when the game ball is won in the second starting winning opening 14 provided in the variable winning ball device 15, and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small hit symbol. Whether or not to make the display result of the special symbol a small hit symbol is determined in advance by random number lottery (small hit determination of a special symbol). When a small hit occurs, the small hit gaming state is set, and the operation port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened with an opening pattern of 10 times and an opening time of 0.1 seconds. The game control state (big hit probability, small hit probability, base described later) after the end of the small hit gaming state is the same as before the small hit. In the small hit, a winning ball is paid out to the gaming ball that has won the V prize area 870 in the V determination prize apparatus 87 during the small hitting gaming state. In the small hit game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that about 30 winning balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

  If the game ball is made to win a game ball while the operation port of V determination winning device 87 is open and the game ball enters V prize area 870 inside V determination winning device 87 (V winning), a big hit occurs Do. A big hit via such a small hit is called a small hit via a big hit. Small hit via big hit, small hit via 16 (15) R time short hit with different round number in big hit, small hit via 9 (8) R time short hit, and small hit via 5 (4) R time short hit included Be A small hit tied to be able to be a 16 (15) R time short hit is called a first small hit. 9 (8) R small hit that is tied to be able to be a short hit is called the second small hit. A small hit tied so that it may become a 5 (4) R time junior high hit is called a 3rd small hit.

  On the other hand, a big hit that occurs directly due to the variation display of a special symbol without going through a small hit is called a symbol big hit. As a pattern big hit, there are a pattern 15R time short / big hit and a pattern 4R time short / big hit which are generated directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

  In this way, as the big hit, it occurs by V winning via the big hit directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol. Small hit via big hit included. Each big hit of the symbol big hit and the small hit via the big hit is a big hit controlled to a short time state after the end of the big hit gaming state, and is named as a short time big hit. The advantageous state advantageous to the player in the present embodiment includes the opening of the big hit variable winning ball apparatus 20.

  Here, the time saving state will be described. The time saving state is an example of the special game state (advantage state) that is advantageous for the player. The time saving state is a control state in which the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol (rendering symbol) is shortened as compared with the non-time shortening state (normal state). In this way, by shifting to the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the rendering symbol is shortened, so when it becomes the time saving state, the effective start winning is likely to occur and the big hit game may be performed. Increase.

  In the time saving state, the frequency with which the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 15 is increased by increasing the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, and the winning of the variable winning ball device 15 is facilitated ( It is controlled to the high base state which makes high approach, high frequency).

  Here, the “base” is a ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out as a winning ball in accordance with a winning to the number of firing balls. The state where active control is performed to increase this ratio is the "high base state". On the other hand, the state where such control is not performed is the "low base state". Such control is realized, for example, as control for enhancing the occurrence of the start winning which triggers the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 (so-called electric tulip) is increased in the opening frequency and the number of times of opening, or the opening time of one time is increased. It can be realized as control that facilitates winning. Such control is also referred to as "power control support control". That is, in the high base state, the frequency at which the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 15 is increased by increasing the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 serving as the variation symbol of the special symbol is opened. It is a control state in which winning on the winning ball device 15 is facilitated (high approach, high frequency). The “electric chew support control” is generally referred to by the abbreviation “power support”, and the abbreviation “power support” may be used in this embodiment.

  Further, the high base control (electric chew support control) will be described in detail. As high base control (electric chew support control), control to shorten the fluctuation time of normal pattern (time from the start of fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of display result) and derive the display result at an early stage (normal symbol shortening Control), control to increase the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is hit and to increase the probability of becoming a symbol (normal symbol probability change control), control to lengthen the open time of the variable winning ball device 15 (normal electric character) (open time extension control) A control is performed to increase the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device which is a trigger for fluctuation of the special symbol (control of increasing the number of times of opening). When such control is performed, the percentage of time during which the variable winning ball device serving as the special symbol variation trigger is open is higher than when the control is not performed, so the game ball starts up. It becomes easy to win (the execution condition of the variable display in the special symbol displays 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 is easily established).

  In addition, the symbol 15R time minor hit is a big hit when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (15R). The symbol 4R time minor hit is a big hit when the big winning opening is opened 4 times (4R). The small hit via 16 (15) R hour minor hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 15 times (15 R) on condition of V winning The winning device is open for 16 rounds, but the number of opening times of the large winning opening is 15 times, and the player, regarding opening of the large winning opening, is the same big hit as the pattern 15R time short hit. I feel the type. The small hit via 9 (8) R time minor hit is a big hit opening 8 times (8R) is opened on condition of V winning after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds × 10 times) It is. The small hit via 5 (4) R hour minor hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened 1 time (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 4 times (4 R) on condition of V winning. The winning device is open for 5 rounds, but the number of opening times of the large winning opening is practically 4 times, and the player, regarding the opening of the large winning opening, is the same big hit as the pattern 4R time short hit. I feel the type.

  In the time saving state after hitting the symbol 4R time minors, the ending condition that the number of variation display of the second special symbol is one, and the ending condition that the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is five Two end states are set. The number of time-saving end conditions such that the number of times of the variable display number of the second special symbol is 1 takes into consideration that the gaming ball entering the V determination winning device 87 enters the V winning region 870 at a rate of 100%. Is set. In the variation display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of the variable display number of the second special symbol is one, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, may generate a big hit via small hit at a ratio of about 1/7. There are a number of times.

  The number of time-saving end conditions where the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is one is set for the following reasons. In the case of the symbol 4R time minor hit, basically the short time status (including the power supply status) is continued until the variation display of the second special symbol is completed once, but to display the second special symbol variably, It is necessary to hit the right and make the game ball enter the gate 32 and open the variable winning ball device 15, and in that state it is necessary to make the variable ball device 15 win the game ball, such variable winning ball device 15 It may take time to win the game ball, and the first special symbol stored on hold may be variably displayed first.

  Therefore, the termination condition that the total number of times of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 5 is the big hit before the fluctuation display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied immediately after the start of the time saving state. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol by hold storage based on the first start winning that can be stored up to four before the gaming state is started, it is one of the second special symbols that are easily determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player It is a condition for making it possible to execute the variable fluctuation display reliably. By doing this, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol by the retention memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so it is easy to be determined as a big hit advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the change display of the second special symbol from being stopped.

  After the big hit other than the pattern 4R time minor hit, the end condition that the number of variation display of the second special symbol is seven times, the end condition that the total number of times of the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times Two end states are set. The number of times of the ending condition of the time saving state of seven is set in consideration of the fact that the gaming ball entering the V determination winning device 87 enters the V winning region 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variation display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of the variable display of the second special symbol is 7 times may generate a big hit via the small hit when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, compared to the symbol 4R time short and large hit. Is the number of times it gets significantly higher. Thus, the player can be made to pay attention to the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit can be enhanced.

  In addition, the ending condition that the total number of times of the variable display number of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is 11 is the big hit before the fluctuation display start condition of the 2nd special symbol is satisfied immediately after the start of time saving state. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol by hold storage based on the first start winning that can be stored up to four before the gaming state is started, 7 of the second special symbol which is easily determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player This is to ensure that the fluctuation display of the number of fluctuation times can be performed. By doing this, the variation display of the first special symbol by the retention memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so it is easy to be determined as a big hit advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of changes in the second special symbol from being reduced.

  In this embodiment, in the low base state which is a normal state, since the first start winning opening 13 is provided to be able to win from the first route, the game ball flowing down the first route is the first It is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting winning than playing balls flowing down the two paths. On the other hand, in the advantageous state such as the jackpot gaming state, since the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 to be opened is provided to be able to win from the second path, the one where the gaming ball flows down the second path is the first path It is more advantageous for the player in terms of big hit when winning balls than when the game ball flows down. Also, in the specific state such as small hit gaming state, since the V determination winning device 87 to be opened is provided to be able to win from the second route, the one where the game ball flows down the second route is the first route It is more advantageous to the player in terms of the occurrence of a big hit than the game ball flows down.

  In addition, not only comparison of such an advantage, for example, the other winning a prize mouth (for example, another variable winning a prize mouth (may be for start winning or may be for non-start winning) is the first route In the low base state as a normal state, the first path is more likely to win the variable winning opening than the second path, and the high base state, the big hit gaming state, and the small path are provided. In other states, such as a hit gaming state, from the other point of view that the second route is more likely to win the variable winning opening than the first route, in the normal state, the game medium is the first route. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the player who has flowed down is advantageous for the player, and in the other gaming states, it is more advantageous for the player to use the game medium to flow down the second path.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 3, the payout control board 37 and the effect control board 80 are also shown. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control), a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit Including 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer in which the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source, part or all of which is created on the power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state (i.e., the special symbol process flag etc.) according to the control state of the gaming control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs) the following. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a small hit according to the display result of the variation display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit (for example, 65535) are set, and occurs at random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number value based on the fact that the start winning is when the numerical data is read out (extracted). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503.

  In addition, detection control signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start winning opening switch 13a, the second start winning opening switch 14a, the V winning switch 87a, the V determination winning switch 15a, and the V determination discharge switch 15b are used for game control. An input driver circuit 58 to be supplied to the microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main substrate 31. In addition, the solenoid 16 which opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15, the solenoid 21 which opens and closes the big hit variable winning ball device 20, the solenoid 22 which opens and closes the V determination winning device 87 (the movable portion 872) A solenoid 22 for opening and closing the area 870 movable portion 87, a solenoid 24 for opening and closing the V pay area 870 (opening and closing member), and an output circuit 59 driven in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560 are also mounted on the main substrate 31. It is done.

  In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control, the first special symbol indicator 8a which fluctuates and displays the special symbol, the second special symbol indicator 8b, the normal symbol indicator 10 which fluctuates and displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 is performed.

  The effect control board 80 has the effect control microcomputer 100, the ROM 102, the RAM 103, the VDP 109, the I / O port unit 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 100. The VDP 109 cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control of the effect display device 9.

  The effect control command for instructing effect content from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay substrate 77 which allows the signal to pass only in one direction from the main substrate 31 to the effect control substrate 80 from the main substrate 31. , And performs display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side and display control of the V lamp 875 via the lamp driver board 35, and also performs audio display board A variety of effect control is performed such as controlling the sound output from the speaker 27 through 70.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 121 via the I / O port unit 105. input. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 120 has been detected, from the push sensor 124 via the I / O port unit 105. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the operation action of the technician with respect to the operation stick of the stick controller 122 is detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the I / O port unit 105. Input. Further, the effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the I / O port unit 105.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view showing each random number. In FIG. 4, the type of random number, the update range, the application, and the addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

  (1) Random 1: A random counter for determining whether or not to make a big hit and whether to make a small hit or not. Random 1 is updated one by one at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated from 0 again. (2) Random 2: type of big hit (type, pattern 15 R time short hit, pattern 4 R time short hit, small hit via 16 (15) R time short hit, small hit via 9 (8) R time short hit, and small hit via 5 (4) Determine the type of R time short / big hit) and the big hit symbol (for big hit type determination, for big hit symbol determination). (3) Random 3: Determine the type (type) of variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination). (4) Random 4: Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 5: It determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol determination). (6) Random 6: Determine the initial value of random 5 (for determination of random 5 initial value).

  In this embodiment, as a big hit that is a specific gaming state, pattern 15R time short and big hit, pattern 4R time short and big hit, small hit via 16 (15) R time short and big hit, small hit via 9 (8) R time short and big hit, and small hit Via 5 (4) R hour and time junior high hit multiple categories are included. Therefore, based on the value of the random number for random determination (random 1), when it is determined to be a big hit, or when it is determined to be a small hit, based on the value of the random number for big hit type determination (random 2) The type of jackpot is determined to be any of these jackpot types. However, in the case of a big hit via a small hit, the determined big hit is invalidated if no V prize occurs. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2) at the same time. Therefore, random 2 is also a jackpot symbol determination random number.

  Also, when it is determined to be a type of small hit, a small hit symbol is determined at the same time. Therefore, random 2 is also a small hit symbol determination random number.

  In addition, first, the variation pattern type is determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 3), and the variation pattern is included in the determined variation pattern type using the variation pattern determination random number (random 4) Determine the fluctuation pattern of As such, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is one in which a plurality of variation patterns are grouped according to the feature of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type.

  In this embodiment, the fluctuation patterns are classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type which is a fluctuation pattern type without a reach and a reach fluctuation pattern type which is a fluctuation pattern type with a reach.

  Such a variation pattern type is set to be different because the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different between the time saving state and the time non-saving state, when the display result is a loss. , The fluctuation time is shortened compared to when not in the time saving state. For example, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than that in the time shortening, in order to shorten the average time of fluctuation time as compared with the time not being time saving state. The rate at which the variation pattern type with a short time is selected increases, and even when the reach type is selected, the rate at which the variation pattern of normal reach with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation pattern types is set to be high. By doing this, the average time of the fluctuation time becomes shorter than when not in the short time state.

  In addition, such a variation pattern type includes a variation pattern type (for example, a variation pattern type in which an effect related to a small hit is executed, etc.) selectable when the small hit occurs, and a small hit. Includes a non-selectable variation pattern type (for example, a variation pattern type in which an effect having no relevance to a small hit is executed). Such a variation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit is a variation pattern for which a specific effect is performed, and includes a variation pattern for which a predetermined suggested effect regarding a small hit is performed. Therefore, when a variation pattern in which a predetermined suggestion effect regarding such a small hit is performed is executed, it is possible to boost the player's sense of expectation. The selectable variation pattern types for small hits can be selected for both small hits and non-small hits, and the smaller hits do not result in smaller hits. Is also set to be high. As a result, even if it is a variation pattern type that can be selected when it becomes a small hit, it also occurs when it does not become a small hit, so it is known in advance to the player that it becomes a small hit from the type of variation pattern to be executed. You can try to avoid it. On the other hand, the variation pattern type that can not be selected when the small hit is, for example, the variation pattern that is not related to the small hit, which suggests that the big hit is not directly caused by the small hit. It is possible not to complicate the relation between the effect of the fluctuation pattern and the display result by making it impossible to select when it is a small hit. It should be noted that the variation pattern that can be selected when the small hit is made is set such that the one set for the specific variation time is selected based on the correspondence relationship with the release control of V determination winning device 87 . If the variation pattern in which the predetermined suggestion effect regarding such a small hit is executed is made executable when the small hit is made, the player's expectation for the small hit at the time of the variable display may be enhanced. it can. Furthermore, it is possible for the player to be able to easily cope with a game specific to a small hit gaming state that it is necessary to cause the game ball to enter the V determination winning device 87 within a predetermined period to obtain a big hit. It is possible to make it difficult for a person to escape the advantageous state of causing the game ball to enter the V determination winning device 87.

  Also, the variation pattern selectable at the time of the small hit may not be limited to a specific variation time. Also, the variation pattern that can be selected when the small hit does not have to be a predetermined suggestion effect for the small hit. In addition, the variation pattern may be divided and provided depending on when it is a small hit, when it is a departure, and when it is a big hit. In addition, the variation pattern does not divide the variation pattern between when it is a small hit, when it is out of place, and when it is a big hit, and when any variation display result is obtained, the type of the variation pattern to be selected The range of may be the same.

  Also, instead of separately setting the variation pattern type and the variation pattern and determining the variation pattern by the two-step lottery process, using only the variation pattern determination random number without providing the variation pattern type, one stage The variation pattern may be determined by

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing a first special drawing hit determination table, a second special drawing hit determination table, and various big hit type judgment tables. These tables are stored in the ROM 54.

  FIG. 5A is an explanatory view of a first special drawing hit determination table. The first special drawing hit determination table is a data table for determining a big hit for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The “probability” shown in FIG. 5A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit.

  FIG. 5 (B) is an explanatory view showing a second special drawing hit determination table. The second special view-per-minute determination table is a data table for making a big hit determination and a small hit determination for the second special symbol, and a big hit determination value to be compared with random 1 and a small hit determination value are set. Table. The upper stage in FIG. 5B is the big hit determination table unit, and the lower stage in FIG. 5B is the small hit determination table unit. The “probability” shown in the upper part of FIG. 5B indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit, and the “probability” shown in the lower part of FIG. 5B indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a small hit.

  When the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (first starting winning) or the starting winning to the second start winning opening 14 (second starting winning) is detected, the CPU 56 random numbers at a predetermined timing. The count value (random 1) of the circuit 503 is extracted. For the first start winning, compare the extracted value with the big hit judgment value set in the first special view per judgment table, and if the extracted value matches any of the big hit judgment values, make a big hit for the first special symbol Decide on. For the second start winning combination, compare the extracted value with the big hit judgment value set in the 2nd special view per judgment table, and if the extracted value matches any of the big hit judgment values, make a big hit for the second special symbol Decide on. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the big hit judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the second special view per judgment table, and the extracted value is judged with any small hit judgment value. If they match, it is decided to make a small hit for the second special symbol. Deciding to make a small hit means making a tentative decision to make a big hit via a small hit (it will be described as a tentative decision because it will not be controlled to a big hit if a V prize does not occur during a small hit) .

  In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit is to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol by the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is made a big hit symbol It is also to decide whether to do or not. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a small hitting gaming state, but do you want to make the stop symbol by the variable display of the second special symbol a small hit symbol It is also to decide whether or not.

  In addition, about 1st special symbol, although it is set so that determination with small hitting may not be performed, it may be set so that determination with small probability may be made about a 1st special symbol with a predetermined probability.

  FIGS. 5C, 5D, and 5E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. FIG. 5C is a first special view big hit type determination table used to determine the big hit type of the big hit symbol when it is determined to be a big hit by the first special symbol. FIG. 5D is a second special view big hit classification determination table used to determine the big hit type of the big hit design when it is determined to be a big hit by the second special symbol.

  The first special figure big hit type determination table in FIG. 5C is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 2 for big hit type determination, and it is between "pattern 15R time short and big hit" and "pattern 4R time short and big hit" A big hit judgment value corresponding to each is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5D, a jackpot determination value corresponding to “pattern 15R hour minors hit” is set, which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5C and 5D, the big hit type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the big hit symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. For example, the determination value corresponding to "8R hour minors hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the big hit symbol. The determination value corresponding to "15 R hour-time big hit" is also set as a determination value corresponding to "7" of the big hit symbol.

  Using such various big hit classification judgment tables, the CPU 56 determines the type corresponding to the big hit classification judgment value that the value of random 1 matches as the big hit classification, and the value of random 1 matches as the big hit design Determine the jackpot design that has been made. Thereby, the big hit type and the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit type are determined at the same time.

  The small hit via big hit type determination table of FIG. 5 (E) is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 2 for the big hit type determination, and "small hit via 16 (15) R time short hit" and "small hit A big hit judgment value corresponding to each of the via 9 (8) R time short hit and the small hit via 5 (4) R time short hit is set. However, the big hit type determined in the small hit via big hit type judgment table is the first small hit (16 (15) R hour shorts hit), the second small hit (9 (8) R hour short hit) It is a temporary jackpot type associated with each of the third small hit (which will be the 5 (4) R hour short hit), and is invalidated if no V prize occurs in the small hit gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 5, the first short time state (one to five times variable display) and the second time short state (fluctuary) in which the number of times of the variable display controlled to the short time state (high base state) is different. By the existence of a plurality of time saving states such as display 7 times to 11 times), the game in the time saving state is rich in variety, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Next, the execution mode of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the short time state controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state of various jackpots will be described. Here, the time saving state to be controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state of the symbol 4R time short playing is described as a representative example. FIG. 6 is a table showing an example of the execution mode of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the short time state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state of the symbol 4R time minor hit.

  Change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the first time short state controlled to the time saving state for a relatively small number of fluctuation display (1 to 5 times) after the end of the big hit gaming state of 4R time shorts hit As for the display, comparing the case where the first special symbol holding memory exists before the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state and the case where the first special symbol holding memory does not exist before the occurrence of the big hit gaming state As shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the execution balance aspect of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state is different.

  FIG. 6A shows a variation display example of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the case where there is one suspension memory of the first special symbol at the start of the time saving state control. FIG. 6 (B) shows a variation display example of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when there is no hold storage of the first special symbol at the start of the time saving state control.

  In pachinko gaming machine 1, when being controlled to the big hit gaming state in a state where the first pending storage or the second pending storage is present, the pending storage existing before the control to the big hit gaming state is the big hit game In the state, the memory state is continued and carried over until the end of the big hit gaming state, and is used for variable display after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (A), at the start of the first short time state after the end of the big hit gaming state at the 8R time short jackpot, the first special symbol based on the retention memory existing before control to the big hit gaming state When there is a pending memory, since the starting winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 for variable display is not yet performed for the second special symbol to be preferentially executed, in the time saving state, first, 1 As the variable display of the second time, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the holding storage of the first special symbol carried over before the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is executed. The time saving state after the big hit gaming state end of the 8R time big hit is right-handed and a game is performed in which the game ball is made to enter the gate 32 and the second start winning opening 14, as shown in FIG. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 can be executed.

  After the start of the time saving state, until the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs, when there is a reserved memory of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory Is executed. In FIG. 6 (A), one of the first special symbols that existed before control to the jackpot gaming state after the start of the time saving state until the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs An example is shown where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed once based on the pending storage of. In FIG. 6A, after the start of the time saving state, the second time after the start of the time saving state based on the fact that the variable display based on the start winning at the second start winning opening 14 is performed once at the second time. An example is shown in which time saving control ends in the variable display.

  As for the start winning for the second start winning opening 14, four pieces of storage information can be stored as described above. Therefore, after the start of the first short time state, variable winning ball device 15 in the power support state which is executed, for example, until one execution of the variable display based on the start winning on second start winning opening 14 is finished. During the release control state of the second, as shown in FIG. 6A, a maximum of four second pending storage information can occur. In this embodiment, in the case of the first time-short state, the fluctuation display is long on the basis of the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 for the first time so that the second reserve memory information is easily accumulated. Is executed. Note that the variable display may not be performed such that the variable display time is somewhat long.

  Thereafter, when the second hold storage information is stored until one execution of the variable display based on the start winning on the second start winning opening 14 is finished, for example, the third time in FIG. As shown in the second special symbol of the sixth to the second special symbol of the variable display column, variable display based on the maximum of four second pending memory information is executed, small win lottery of the winning probability of about 1/7 second pending It can be executed by the number of stored information. As a result, even if the first time saving state ends, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit via the small hitting based on the second pending storage information generated during the first time saving state.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6B, at the start of the time saving state, when there is no holding memory of the first special symbol based on the holding memory existing before control to the big hit gaming state, the 4Rs In the time saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the game is made to enter the game ball into the gate 32 and the second start winning opening 14 is made right hit, the game ball can not enter the first start winning hole 13 Since it will be in the gaming state, as shown in FIG. 6 (B), the variable display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 from the first variable display may be executed. Also in this case, as in the case of with pending storage in FIG. 6A, a maximum of four second pending storage information as shown in FIG. 6B can occur. As a result, even if the first time saving state ends, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit via the small hitting based on the second pending storage information generated during the first time saving state.

  As described above, the termination condition of the first time short state after the big hit gaming state end of the 4R time junior high school big hit, the variation display of the second special symbol was executed once, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol This holds true when the variable display is executed a total of five times.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (A), at the start of the time saving state, after the variable display of the first special symbol based on the three reserved memories of the first special symbol existing at the start is executed three times, When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed for the fourth time, the end condition is displayed by executing the variable display count of the second special symbol once by executing the fourth variable display. The control of the first short time state is ended.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (B), at the start of the time saving state, when there is no suspension storage of the first special symbol at the start and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed from the first time, 1 Since the number of times of the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once in the first variable display, the termination condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and the control of the time saving state is ended.

  The termination condition of the first time short state after the big hit gaming state end of the 4R time junior high big hit was executed once for the variable display number of the second special symbol, or the total of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is set to be established when the number of times is executed five times. Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 6 (A), even if there is a reserved memory of the first special symbol at the start of the first short time state, the first special symbol in the first short time state from the variable display of the first special symbol Also, the variable display of the second special symbol advantageous to the player is executed the same number of times (one) at the start of the first time reduction state as when there is no holding memory of the first special symbol. The state ends.

  Also, for example, even if there is a maximum of four first special symbol hold memories at the start of the first time short state, the first special symbol fluctuation display based on the four hold memories in the first time short state The first time saving state is ended by being executed the same number of times (one time) at the start of the first time saving state as when there is no pending storage of the first special symbol.

  As described above, the termination condition of the first short time state after the big hit gaming state end of the 4R time minor hit is executed once for the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol By being set to be established when the total number of times of the variable display is executed five times, the first special symbol at the start of the first short time state with and without the pending storage of the first special symbol Since the number of executable times of the variation display of the second special symbol advantageous to the player can be the same number during the control period of 1:00 state, the advantage and disadvantage for the player in the time reduction state (high base state) are different It is possible to prevent that and ensure the fairness of the game.

  As shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6 etc., the termination condition of the first short time state defined by the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the maximum number of times the variation display is performed by the first hold storage Because it is set to the total number of times (four times) and the specified number of times (one time) when the variable display predetermined for the second special symbol is performed, it is set to the total number of times. Even if the display is performed a certain number of times, the first hold memory information can prevent the player from making a difference between advantage and disadvantage, and can ensure the fairness of the game.

  In addition, for the big hit type other than symbol 4R time minor hit, the minimum fluctuation display number "1" in the time minor state in symbol 4 R time minor hit mentioned above is replaced with "7", the maximum in time minor condition in symbol 4R time minor hit mentioned above The variable display number "5" is replaced with "11". Therefore, even if the big hit type other than the symbol 4R time minor hit, as in the case of the 8R time minor hit, the presence or absence of the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol at the start of the first time short state after the big hit gaming state end And, regardless of whether or not, the second short time state continues until the same 7 times of the second special symbol variation display is executed. Thereby, about big hit classifications other than the symbol 4R time minor hit, the same effect as the effect acquired about the pattern 4 R time minor hit mentioned above can be acquired.

  As shown in FIG. 6, when the number of times of short (power support) after the big hit is set to a relatively small number, as described above, the player is determined by the number of first holding memory information immediately after the big hit gaming state ends. It is preferable not to reduce the number of times (power support) that would be disadvantageous to the

  FIGS. 7 and 8 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. In FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, the relationship between specific command data for the effect control command, the name of the command, and the designated content of the command is shown. As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits various effect control commands to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the game control state.

  The main commands in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a fluctuation pattern to be variably displayed on the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fluctuation display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the fluctuation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when the command 80XX (H) is received, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to start the effect corresponding to the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the effect display device.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are display result designation commands showing display results including an out-of-display result, a big hit type, a big hit display result for each small hit type, and a small hit display result.

  The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol determination designating command for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

  The commands A001 to A005 (H) are hit start designation commands for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state for each jackpot type.

  The command A1XX (H) is a large winning opening open designation command indicating a display of the number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening a big winning opening, which indicates after opening (closing) a special winning opening of the number (round) indicated by XX.

  The commands A301 to A305 (H) are hit end designation commands for specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state for each jackpot type.

  Command A 401 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that there has been a first start prize. The command A 402 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there has been a second start prize.

  The command B 000 (H) is a normal state designation command which designates that the gaming state is the normal state (low base state). The command B 001 (H) is a first time shorting state designating command specifying that the gaming state is the first time shorting state (high base state). The command B 002 (H) is a second time shorting state designating command specifying that the gaming state is the second short time state (high base state).

  The command C0XX (H) is a first pending storage number specification command for specifying the first pending storage number. "XX" in the command C0XX (H) indicates the first pending storage number. The command C1XX (H) is a second pending storage number designation command for specifying the second pending storage number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the second pending storage number.

  In this embodiment, in the case of subtracting the number of stored memories, microcomputer 560 for gaming control transmits a number-of-held storages specifying command for specifying the number of stored memories after subtraction, but the present invention is not limited to this. For each of the first number of pending storages and the second number of pending storages, a pending storage number subtraction designation command may be used which designates that the number of pending storages should be decremented by one.

  The command C2XX (H) and the command C3 XX (H) are the winning determination results of the big hit determination, big hit type determination, fluctuation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 It is an effect control command indicating the content. Among these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol specifying command indicating whether or not to be a big hit, whether or not to be a small hit, and the type of the big hit among the determination results at the time of winning. Further, command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating the determination result (determination result of variation pattern type) of which determination value range the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is among the winning determination results. It is.

  The command C 401 (H) is a command for designating start of the first small hit. The command C 402 (H) is a command specifying that the second small hit be started. The command C403 (H) is a command for designating start of the third small hit. The command C 501 (H) is a command for designating start of the first small hit. The command C 502 (H) is a command for designating start of the second small hit. The command C 503 (H) is a command for designating start of the third small hit. The command C601 (H) is a V prize designating command for designating that there is a V prize winning. The command C 602 (H) is a V winning ball detection designation command which designates that a winning ball (including both V winning balls and winning balls other than V winning balls) to the V determination winning device 87 is detected.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the RAM 55 is provided with a first hold storage buffer for storing hold storage information of the first special symbol. In the first pending storage buffer, a saving area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first pending storage number is secured. In the first holding storage buffer, a jackpot determination random number (random 1) which is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 2) which is a software random number, a fluctuation pattern type determination random number (random 3), , A variation pattern determination random number (random 4) is stored.

  For the second special symbol, the RAM 55 is provided with a second suspension storage buffer for storing suspension storage information of the second special symbol. In the second pending storage buffer, a saving area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second pending storage number is secured. The second reserve storage buffer is a jackpot determination random number (random 1) which is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 2) which is a software random number, a fluctuation pattern type determination random number (random 3), , A variation pattern determination random number (random 4) is stored.

  Based on the winning on the first start winning opening 13, the CPU 56 extracts random values from each of the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area of the first storage buffer. Execute processing to save (store). Specifically, these random number values are extracted based on the winning on the first start winning opening 13 and are stored (stored) in the first hold storage buffer. Further, based on the winning on the second start winning opening 14, the CPU 56 extracts random values from each of the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the second storage buffer. Execute processing to save (store) in the area. Specifically, these random number values are extracted based on the winning on the second start winning opening 14 and are stored (stored) in the second hold storage buffer.

  As described above, the storage of the information on the start winning combination as described above in the reserve storage buffer may be indicated as "preserve storage". The random number for fluctuation pattern type judgment (random 2) and the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 4) are not extracted at the start winning combination and stored in advance in the reserve storage buffer, but fluctuation pattern setting processing described later You may make it extract (at the time of the fluctuation start of a special symbol).

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main substrate 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically taken for a predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is executed. As a result, various game control can be performed.

  In the main processing, for example, necessary initialization processing, initialization processing at normal time, gaming state recovery processing at times other than normal, random number circuit setting processing (initial setting of random number circuit 503), random number update processing for display (variation pattern The determination of the type of the object, the update process of various random numbers such as the change pattern determination), and the update process of the initial value random number (update process of the initial value of the count value of the random number generation counter for determination per symbol).

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes timer interrupt processing of steps S (hereinafter simply referred to as "S") 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (S20). Then, through the input driver circuit 58, the gate switch 32a, the first start winning opening switch 13a, the second start winning opening switch 14a, the count switch 23, the V winning switch 87a, the V determination winning switch 15a, and the V determination discharge The detection signal of the switch 15b is input, and the state determination is performed (switching process: S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 displays the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, the first special symbol hold memory indicator 18a, the second special symbol hold memory indicator 18b, the ordinary symbol A display control process is performed to control display of the hold storage indicator 41 (S22). With regard to the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the normal symbol display 10, control is performed to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Run.

  Further, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating random numbers for determination such as a random number for determining a normal symbol and a random number for determining small hit type for use in game control (random number update processing for determination: S23 ). The CPU 56 further performs processing for updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (S26). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening in a predetermined order, and the special symbol process is performed. The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding processing according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order, and changes the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state Update accordingly.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending out the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer, for example (S29).

  In addition, the CPU 56 executes an award ball process for setting the number of award balls based on detection signals of the first start winning opening switch 13a, the second start winning opening switch 14a, and the prize winning switch 25a (S30).

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to the ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (S31: output processing).

  The CPU 56 also performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( S32).

  Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( S33). Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (S34), and the process ends. By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every predetermined time.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, start opening switch passage processing is executed (S311). Then, depending on the internal state, one of the processes in S300 to S310 is performed.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the RAM 55 stores, as described above, pending storage data (first pending storage data) such as a jackpot determination random number obtained based on the starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13. A second holding storage buffer for storing holding storage data (second holding storage data) such as a jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start winning for the second start winning opening 14; Is provided. In each of the pending storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 for the first pending storage data, 4 for the second pending storage data) of the storage number of each pending storage is secured.

  In the starting opening switch passing process, if the first starting opening switch 13a is turned on, the number of first holding storage data stored under the condition that the first number of holding storages has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the first reserved memory number counter that counts the number is incremented by 1, and numerical data from the random number circuit 503 or the counter for generating software random numbers (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination Processing for extracting (random numbers) and storing them in the storage area of the first pending storage buffer. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 14a is turned on, the number of second pending storage data is counted on condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the pending storage number counter is increased by 1, and numeric data (for example, a random number for big hit determination, a random number for variation pattern type determination, and a random number for variation pattern determination) are extracted from the random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating software random numbers. And store them in the storage area of the second pending storage buffer.

  With regard to the following description regarding pending storage, it may be indicated as "pending on storage" that information regarding the start winning combination as described above is stored in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer. Also, numerical data stored in the first storage buffer may be referred to as first storage data, and numerical data stored in the second storage buffer may be referred to as second storage data.

The processes of S300 to S307 are the following processes.
The special symbol normal processing (S300) is processing to determine whether or not the display result of the variable display is to be a small hit, and to determine the type of small hit if it is to be a small hit. The fluctuation pattern setting process (S301) is a process for controlling the determination of the fluctuation pattern and the start of counting of the fluctuation time timer.

  The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process for performing control of transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The special symbol variation processing (S303) is processing for advancing the process to the special symbol stop processing when the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting processing has elapsed. Special symbol stop processing (S304), when the lapse of the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is counted by the fluctuation time timer, the fluctuation display in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b A process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

  The big winning opening open pre-processing (S305) is processing for performing control to open the big winning opening in the big hit variable winning ball device 20 when the big hit gaming state is reached. The special winning opening open process (S306) performs control to transmit the effect control command of the round display during the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, and processing to confirm establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening, etc. It is a process. When the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process shifts to the big hit end processing. The big hit end process (S307) is a process for performing control for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  The small hit opening pre-processing (S308) is processing for performing control such as opening the operation opening in the V determination winning device 87 when the small hit gaming state is reached. The small hit opening process (S309) checks whether or not the gaming ball has won V in the V prize area 870 in the V determination prize apparatus 87, and transmits a V prize designation command when V is awarded, and When the small hit end timing comes, the small hit end designation command is transmitted.

  The small hit end process (S310) is a process to shift to the big hit gaming state when the gaming ball wins V in the V winning area 870 in the big hit variable winning ball device 20 (transmission of big hit start designated command, big hit display Setting of time, setting of big hit opening mode, transition setting of process flag of big winning a prize opening opening processing etc) is executed, on the one hand, when the V winning a prize is not done, without making it shift to the big hit game state, it is special It is processing which performs processing for shifting to design normal processing (S300).

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of S312. In the starting opening switch passage process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the first starting opening switch 13a is in the on state (S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not in the on state, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first start port switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the first number of pending storages has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first pending storage for counting the first number of pending storages) Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is checked (S1212). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to S1221.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area of the first hold storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a jackpot determination random number (random R), a jackpot type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted, It is stored in the save area.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect rendering process in which a variation display result and a variation pattern type when a variation based on the start winning combination of the detected first special symbol is executed thereafter is determined in advance at the start winning combination (S1215).

  In this embodiment, the start winning at the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 occurs, and after various data obtained at the time of the start winning is stored as pending storage information, the start of the variable display When the condition is satisfied, at the timing of starting the variable display, the special symbol normal processing (S300) changes the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) to start the variable display based on the pending storage information. The determination as to whether or not the display result is a big hit display result, and the determination of the big hit type are performed based on the big hit determination value set corresponding to the various random number values described above and the big hit type determination value. Then, the determination of the fluctuation pattern (including the determination of the fluctuation pattern type) in the fluctuation pattern setting process (S301) is performed using the fluctuation pattern type judgment value set corresponding to the various random number values described above and the fluctuation pattern judgment value. Do based on.

  On the other hand, separately from such determination, the timing before the variable display based on the start winning on the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 is started, specifically, the game ball is at the first starting At the timing when the start winning is made to the winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 (the timing when the stored storage information is stored), the pending storage information storing various data obtained at the time of the starting winning is prefetched and the prefetched pending Based on the stored information, determination of whether or not to be a big hit, determination of whether or not to be a small hit, determination of the type of big hit, and determination of the variation pattern type in advance corresponding to the various random number values described above The prize effect process is executed at the time of pre-reading determination based on the set big hit determination value, big hit type determination value, and variation pattern type determination value. By doing so, the effect control microcomputer 100 predicts the fluctuation display result in advance before the fluctuation display of the effect design is executed, and based on the various determination results at the start winning, It is possible to execute pre-reading effect such as pre-reading notice etc. for giving notice of becoming a big hit (probability of becoming a big hit) during the variable display.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (S1216), and transmits the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (S1217). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S 1218), and also sets the value of the first pending storage number counter to EXT data to designate the first pending storage number Control is performed to transmit a command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1219).

  By executing the processing of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (the gaming state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, big hit gaming state, etc.) Every time the start winning hole 13 is started, both the symbol designating command and the variation type command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize for the first start winning opening 13 is generated by executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, the symbol designating command, the variation type command, and the first start prize designating command And, a set of four commands of the first reserved storage number designation command is sent collectively in one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the second start port switch 14a is in the on state (S1221). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the on state, the process ends. If the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the second number of pending storages has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending storage for counting the second number of pending storages) Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is checked (S1222). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second pending storage number counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area of the second hold storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a jackpot determination random number (random 1), a jackpot type determination random number (random 2), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 3), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 4) are extracted. It is stored in the save area.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a prize-time presentation process similar to the prize-time presentation process as described in S1215, for the detected start-up prize of the second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (S1226), and controls to transmit the variation type command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control (S1227). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S 1228), sets the value of the second hold storage number counter to the EXT data, and designates the second hold storage number Control is performed to transmit a command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1229).

  By executing the processing of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (the gaming state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, big hit gaming state, etc.), the second Every time the start winning hole 14 is started, both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize for the second start winning opening 14 is generated by executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, the symbol designating command, the variation type command, and the second start prize designating command And a set of four commands of the second reserved storage number designation command are transmitted collectively in one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing (S300) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (S51). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the process ends.

  If there is no hold storage data in the hold storage buffer at S51, the process for transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command (S80) is performed, and then the process is ended. On the other hand, when there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer in S51, the CPU 56 checks whether there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer (S52). If there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer, a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no hold storage data in the second hold storage buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a depending on whether the data indicating the "first" is set to the special symbol pointer or the data indicating the "second" is set. The variable display of the second special symbol display in the second special symbol display 8b is performed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol display is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer. Be On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the second special symbol variation display on the second special symbol display 8b based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer Is done.

  If at least one second hold storage data exists in the second hold storage buffer under the control of S52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol display 8b based on the data of the second hold storage is It is executed prior to the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a based on the data of the first storage.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages of 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. Are read out and stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second holding storage number = 1 in the second holding storage buffer. It stores in the random number buffer of RAM55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the pending storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and for each saving area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift the content. When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the content of the storage area in the second hold storage buffer is erased.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 55. The stored random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 55 The respective random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is supposed to be. In addition, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is supposed to be.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the pending storage number designation command of the special symbol pointer to the microcomputer 100 for effect control based on the value of the pending storage number counter of the special symbol pointer after subtraction. (S59). In this case, when the value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first number-of-held-storages specifying command. When the special symbol pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

  In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating the "first" indicating that the processing is performed targeting the first start winning opening 13; that is, the processing indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol Data indicating "" or data indicating "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is, "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second special symbol Data is set to the special symbol pointer. And in subsequent processing in special symbol process processing, processing according to data set to a special symbol pointer is performed. Therefore, the processing of S300 to S307 can be made common to the case where the first special symbol is targeted and the case where the second special symbol is targeted.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 1 (big hit determination random number) from the random number buffer and executes the big hit determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random number extracted in S1214 of the starting opening switch passing processing and S1224 of the starting opening switch passing processing and stored in the suspension storage buffer or the random number buffer to perform the big hit determination. The big hit determination module compares a predetermined big hit determination value (see FIG. 5) or a small hit determination value (see FIG. 5) with the big hit determination random number, and if they match, it is determined as a big hit or a small hit. It is a program that executes the processing to be determined. That is, it is a program for executing the process of the big hit determination and the process of the small hit determination.

  In the process of jackpot determination, if the first special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 5 (A), the second special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 5 (B) Then, it decides to make a big hit regarding the special symbol. If it is determined to be a big hit (Y in S60), the process proceeds to S71. To decide whether to make a big hit is to decide whether to shift to a big hit gaming state, but it is also to decide whether to make the stop symbol in the special symbol display a big hit symbol or not .

  When it is determined to make a big hit in S61 (Y in S61), a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit is set (S71).

  Next, it is determined whether the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is "first", the first special figure big hit type determination table of FIG. 5 (C) is selected (S73), and the process proceeds to S75. On the other hand, when the special symbol pointer does not indicate the "first" (when the "second" is indicated), the second special figure big hit type determination table of FIG. 5 (D) is selected (S74), S75 Go to

  In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value matching the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is set as the jackpot type It decides (S75), advances to S81.

  Also, if the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the big hit determination values in S61 (N of S61), the data set in the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second" By checking whether or not there is, it is checked whether or not the jackpot determination target is the variation display of the second special symbol (S76). If the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not the data indicating "second" (the first special symbol variation display), the process proceeds to S82 described later. On the other hand, when the data set as the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating “second” (the second special symbol is displayed as a variable), the second special drawing determination table of FIG. 5 (B) The small hit determination process is performed by determining whether or not the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1) matches the small hit determination value using (step S76). That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 5B (Y in S76), it is determined to be a small hit for the second special symbol. Then, if it is determined to make a small hit (S77 Y), a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit is set (S 78).

  After the small hit flag is set, the small hit via big hit type determination table of FIG. 5 (E) is selected (S79), and it matches the value of the random number (random 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer area. The big hit type corresponding to the value to be determined is determined as the small hit via big hit type (S80). Then, the process proceeds to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the small hitting determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the small hitting determination values in S77 (N of S77), the process proceeds to S82 described later.

  In S81, data indicating the type of the big hit determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, if the big hit type is "pattern 15R hour short hit", "01" is set in the big hit type buffer as data indicating the big hit type, and if the big hit type is "pattern 4R time short hit", data indicating the big hit type "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer as On the other hand, when the big hit type is “small hit via 16 (15) R hourly short hit”, “03” is set in the temporary big hit type buffer different from the big hit type buffer as data indicating the big hit type. In the case of the big hit type being a small hit via 9 (8) R time short hit, “04” is set in the temporary big hit type buffer as data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is a small hit via 5 (4) R time short hit, "05" is set in the temporary big hit type buffer as data indicating the big hit type. Among these, the data showing small hit via 16 (15) R time short hit, small hit via 9 (8) R time short hit, and small hit via 5 (4) R time short hit, V winning in the small hit gaming state If there is no occurrence of jackpot, there is data that becomes invalid without the occurrence of a big hit, and it is provisionally set.

  At S82, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set (S78). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an out pattern is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. If the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol according to the small hit type selected and determined in S80 will be one of the "1", "5", "9" determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol Do. When the big hit flag is set, either of “3” and “7” to be the big hit symbol according to the big hit type selected and determined in S75 is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S79).

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing (S304) in the special symbol process processing.

  In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 56 sets an end flag referred to in the special symbol display control processing of S32 to end the variation display of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b Control to derive and display the stop symbol is performed (S131). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a is ended, and the data indicating "second" is displayed in the special symbol pointer. When set, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b is ended. Further, a symbol determination designating command to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 is set (S132). Thereby, the symbol determination designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Then, if the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to S139 (S133).

  When it is determined that the big hit flag is set, as when it is determined that it is determined to be the pattern 15R time short hit or the symbol 4R time short hit, the CPU 56 is a flag that is set when the time saving state is controlled. If it is set, then the short flag is reset (S 134), and either the jackpot start 1 designation command or the jackpot start 2 designation command according to the determined jackpot type to the microcomputer 100 for effect control Processing for transmitting the command (big hit start designation command) of (1) (S135).

  As a result, the set jackpot start designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Specifically, when the type of the big hit is the symbol 4R time short hit, the big hit start 1 designated command is transmitted. When the type of the big hit is the symbol 15R time short hit, the big hit start 2 designated command is transmitted. Whether the jackpot type corresponds to which type is determined based on data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer).

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred, for example, in the effect display device 9) is set in the special winning opening control timer (S136). Thereafter, in the special winning opening opening pre-processing, the special winning opening control timer is decremented by one, and when it becomes 0, the special winning opening is opened and the round is started.

  Further, according to the big hit type specified by the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55, the open pattern data by big hit type stored in the ROM 54 described above is referred to, and the number of times of open (for example, 15 times Data indicating an open mode such as an open time (for example, 29 seconds) or an interval time between rounds (for example, 5 seconds) is set (set) in a predetermined storage area (S137). Among such data, the data of the number of times of release is set in the number of times of release counter for counting the number of times of release. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) (S138), and the processing is ended. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to the special winning opening opening pre-processing.

  When the big hit flag is not set in the above-mentioned S133, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (S139). When the small hit flag is set in S139, the small hit open pattern data stored in the ROM 54 is referred to, and the open count including the setting of the small hit open control timer used for the small hit open control (for example, Data indicating an open mode such as ten times), an open time (for example, 0.1 second), and an interval time between open is set (set) in a specific storage area (S140). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S308) (S141), and the processing is ended. Thereby, a special symbol process shifts to small hit opening pretreatment.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not set in S139, it is checked whether the time short flag indicating the short time due to the first short time state or the second short time state is set (S142). If the time saving flag is not set in S142, the time saving state is not set, so the process proceeds to S152 described later. On the other hand, when the time saving flag is set in S142, since it is in the time saving state, it is for counting the total value of the number of times of the variation display of the first special symbol and the number of the variation display of the second special symbol in the time saving state. The total hour counting number counter as the counting means is updated by -1 subtraction (S143).

  The total hour-time counter to be updated by subtraction in S143 is set to 5 times by S165 when it is controlled to the first time short state after the 4R symbol time-short and big hit in the big hit end processing of FIG. When it is controlled to the second time-short state after the big hit, it is set to 11 times by S168, and in S143, it is subtracted and updated every time when the variable display which is the out-of-page display result is executed once. The total hour-time counter is used to determine both the determination of whether the end condition of the first time-short state is established and the determination of whether the end condition of the second time-short state is established.

  Next, based on checking whether or not the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second", it is checked whether or not it is time to finish the variation display of the second special symbol (S145). If it is time to end the variable display of the first special symbol instead of the second special symbol in S145, the process proceeds to S148 described later. On the other hand, when it is the end time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in S145, the special figure 2 time reduction counter is decremented by -1 and updated (S146). The special figure 2 time reduction counter updated by subtraction in S146 is counting means for counting the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol when being controlled to the first time reduction state or the second time reduction state after the big hit game is over. In the big hit end processing in FIG. 14, the special time 2 time counter is set to 5 times by S165 when being controlled to the first time short state, and is set to 11 times by S168 when being controlled to the second time short state. Be done. The special figure 2 time reduction counter is decremented and updated by S146 every time when the variable display which becomes a disappointing display result of the second special symbol is executed once.

  Next, it is checked whether the count value of the special figure 2 short time counter updated in S146 has become "0" (S147). In S147, when the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter becomes “0”, one of the end conditions of the first time reduction state is satisfied, or one of the end conditions of the second time reduction state is satisfied. Since it is time, the process proceeds to S149 described later in order to end the first short time state or the second short time state being executed. On the other hand, when the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter is not "0" in S147, in order to confirm whether or not another end condition of the end condition of the first time reduction state is satisfied. Proceed to S148.

  In S148, based on the number of times of variation display of the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state, in order to confirm whether the termination condition of the first time shortening state or the second time shortening state is established Then, it is checked whether or not the count value of the total time short-time counter which has been subtracted and updated in S143 has become "0" (S148). If it is determined in S148 that the count value of the total time saving number counter is not "0", the process proceeds to S152 described later. On the other hand, when the count value of the total hour count counter is "0" in S148, the process proceeds to S149.

  In S149 and S150, when it is determined in S147 that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol becomes the number of end conditions in each of the first short time state and the second short time state, the first special symbol and the first special symbol and S148. It is executed to end the first short time status or the second short time status in progress either when it is determined that the total number of variation display count of the second special symbol has become the number of end conditions. .

  At S149, the set time short flag is reset (S149). Next, at S150, the set time number counter is reset (S150). Then, in response to the end of the time saving condition based on the number of times of variation display in the time saving state, processing for transmitting a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S151), and the process proceeds to S152.

  In S152, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S300) (S152), and the processing is ended. Thereby, a special symbol process shifts to special symbol normal processing.

  In such special symbol stop processing, in S142 to S151, in the case of the first time-short state, the execution of one out-of-out variation display of the second special symbol and the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 5 A process of ending the first short time state is performed when one of the execution of the out-of-order change display is established. Also, by S142 to S151, when in the second time-short state, the execution of seven times of the out-of-transit variation display of the second special symbol and the execution of a total of 11 out-of-time variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When any one of the above is established, processing is performed to end the second short time state.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing in the special symbol process processing. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the value of the big winning opening control timer set before the big hit end process is executed (S161). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed (S162). If it has not, the process is ended. On the other hand, if it has elapsed, in the present big hit gaming state, based on data indicating the big hit type set in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55, it is confirmed whether the type of big hit to finish is 8R hour short hit ( S163).

  When the type of big hit that ends with S163 is pattern 4R time short hit, in order to control to the first time short state, as the end condition of the first time short state, the special figure 2 time short counter “1” (second special Set the data of 1 variation display of the symbol) (S164), set the data of "5" (total variation display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol 5 times) to the total time reduction counter (S165) ). Then, processing for transmitting the first time short state designating command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S167), and the process proceeds to S170.

  When the type of big hit that ends with S163 is not the pattern 4R time short hit, it is when the type of big hit that ends is the big hit type other than the pattern 4R time short hit, and the second short time to control to the second short state. Set the data of "7" (corresponding to one variation display of the second special symbol) in the special figure 2 time reduction counter as the ending condition of (S167), and "11" (the first special symbol and The data of the second special symbol total variation display 11 times corresponding) is set (S 168). Then, processing for transmitting the second time short state designating command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S169), and the process proceeds to S170.

  In S170, the time saving flag is set to control the first time shortening state or the second time shortening state (S170). When controlling to the first short time state, the first short time flag is set. On the other hand, when controlling to the second short time state, the second short time flag is set. Then, in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S300) (S171), and the processing is ended. Thereby, a special symbol process shifts to special symbol normal processing.

  As a result, after the end of the big hit gaming state of the symbol 4R time minor hit, it is controlled to the first short state, and after the big hit gaming state of the big hit type other than the symbol 4R hour big hit is controlled to the second short state. And each termination condition of the 1st time short condition and the 2nd time short condition is individually specified by the number of times of the fluctuation indication of only the 2nd special symbol and the number of times of the total fluctuation indication opening of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. Ru.

  In such a big hit end processing, after the end of the big hit gaming state of pattern 4R time big hit in S164 and S165, execution of one out-of-time fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is set that the first time-short state is controlled until any one of a total of five times of execution of the out-of-focus variation display is established. In addition, after the big hit game state of the big hit type other than the symbol 4R time big hit according to S167 and S168, execution of 7 out-of-out fluctuation indication of the 2nd special symbol and the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol total 11 The control is made to control the second time-short state until one of the execution of the out-of-order change display is established.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing small hit opening pre-processing (S308). In the small hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 56 operates the movable portion 872 in the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the small hit opening mode set in S140 of FIG. The mouth opening operation is started (S411). Next, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit start designation command indicating that the small hit gaming state is started to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S412). Next, the CPU 56 sets a V determination winning number counter as counting means in order to use the number of winning to the V winning area 870 in the small hit opening state as the termination condition of the opening state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V determination winning number counter is set to "10", and setting is made to count down the V winning number. Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (S309) (S413).

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing small hit open processing (S309) in the special symbol process processing. In the small hit open processing, the CPU 56 updates the small hit open control timer by subtracting 1 (S430). Next, it is checked whether the count value of the V determination winning number counter, which counts the V winning number in S435 described later, is “0” (S431). The V determination winning number counter is set to "10" in S413 of FIG. 15. When ten V winning balls are counted, the count value becomes "0". If it is determined in S430 that the count value of the V determination winning number counter is "0", then the flow proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the count value of the V determination winning number counter is not "0" in S430, it is confirmed whether the small hit opening control timer set in S140 of FIG. 13 has timed out (timer value = 0). (S432).

  If the small hit open control timer has timed out in S432, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the small hit open control timer has not timed out in S432, the solenoid 22 is controlled corresponding to the time count value of the small hit open control timer based on the small hit open mode set in S140 of FIG. Then, the movable portion 872 is operated in the open state, and the processing for opening and closing the operation port of the V determination winning device 87 is performed (S433).

  Next, in order to determine whether or not the V winning that occurs due to the game ball entering from the V winning opening into the V winning area 870 which is in the open state in the V determination winning device 87, the V winning is It is determined whether the switch 87a is in the on state (S434). When the V prize is detected in S434, the V prize flag is set, which is set when the V prize is detected (S435). Then, processing for transmitting a V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). Thus, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning ball has been detected, and can recognize the V winning number. Next, the open / close member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning opening in the V pay area 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball entering the V determination winning device 87 achieves V, the V winning opening in the V winning area 870 is closed, and then the game enters the V determination winning device 87. The balls are all guided to the winning ball area, and are detected by the V determination winning switch 15b.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the on state in S434, it is when the V winning is not detected, and it is determined whether the V determination winning switch 15b is in the on state (S438). When it is in the on state in S438, the process proceeds to S439, and when it is not in the on state in S438, the process ends.

  In S439, a downcount is performed to decrement the count value of the V determination winning number counter set to "10" in S413 of Fig. 15 by "-1" (S439), and processing for transmitting a V determination prize ball detection designation command (S440). Thus, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning ball that has entered the determination winning device 87 is detected after the V winning ball has been detected, and enters the determination winning device 87. It is possible to recognize the number of game balls played.

  Next, it is determined whether the V prize flag set when the V prize is detected is set (S437). If the V prize flag is set, the process is ended. On the other hand, if the V prize flag is not set, the V prize flag is set according to the detection of the V prize determined in S434 (S438), and processing for transmitting a V prize designation command is performed (S436) , End the process. Thus, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning is detected. In the small hit gaming state, a plurality of gaming balls can enter into the V pay area 870 inside the V determination winning device 87, so when the first V winning ball in the small hit gaming state is detected, S438 is performed. Since the V prize flag is set, control is performed so that S438 and S439 are not executed again even if the second and subsequent V prize balls are detected.

  When the count value of the V determination winning number counter is “0” in S 431, it is when the small hitting open end condition is satisfied because the V winning number of small hits has reached the upper limit value, and When the small hit open control timer times out in S432, the small hit open end condition is satisfied because the small hit open control ends. At these times, the CPU 56 operates the movable portion 872 in a closed state by controlling the solenoid 22 and closes the operation port of the V-judge winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V determination winning number counter becomes “0”, according to the count value of the V determination winning number counter even during the opening of the V determination winning device 87 according to the small hit opening mode The V determination winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small hit open control timer times out, the V-determination winning device 87 is closed in response to the end of the small hit open control in the small hit open mode.

  Next, the data corresponding to the specific period which is the V prize effective period after closing of the V determination prize apparatus 87 is set in the V prize effective period timer (S 442), the value of the special symbol process flag is small hitting end processing ( The value is updated to the value corresponding to S310) (S443), and the process is ended. Thereby, the clocking of the specific period which is the V prize effective period after the closing of the V determination winning device 87 is started. It should be noted that by setting the specific period which is the V prize effective period in this way, even if the game ball passes later than the time when the gaming ball normally passes over time to something of the V prize area, the game ball Can be detected. In addition, since the specific period is set, even if there is a person who attempts to make a prize in the V prize area illegally, only the period is detected, so it is possible to prevent the fraud.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the small hitting end process (S310) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit end post-processing, the CPU 56 updates the V prize effective period timer by subtracting -1 (S441), and confirms whether the V prize effective period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S442).

  When the V prize effective period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether the V prize flag set in S434 or S445 is already set when the V prize is detected (S443). If the V prize flag is set, the process is ended. On the other hand, if the V prize flag is not set, in order to determine whether or not the V prize generated due to the game ball entering the V prize area 870 is detected during the V prize effective period, the V prize switch 87 a Is determined to be in the on state (S444). If it is not in the on state in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is in the on state in S444, it is when the V prize is detected during the V prize effective period, and the V prize flag indicating that the V prize is detected is set (S445). Then, processing for transmitting a V prize designation command is performed (S446), and the processing is ended. Thereby, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning has occurred.

  When the V prize effective period timer has timed out in S442, processing for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (S447). Thus, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the small hit has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 23, control is performed to open the open / close member and return the V pay area 870 (V pay opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V prize flag is set in S448, it is determined to be a big hit, and the big hit flag is set (S449).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as described above, in the small hit gaming state, the game ball is made to enter the V determination winning device 87 with about 100% probability if the right hitting is performed according to the right hitting promotion notification described later. The game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 always makes a V prize in the V prize area 870, and the V prize flag is set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in FIG. 16). Then, the jackpot flag is set in S449, and the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

  Next, the CPU 56 stores the data indicating the big hit type of the small hit via the small hit stored in the big hit temporary type buffer in S81, the data according to the big hit type buffer according to the fact that it is decided that Formally memorize (S450). Then, the short time flag (the first short time flag and the second short time flag set in the big hit end processing of FIG. 14) which has been set at that time is reset once (S 451).

  Next, the CPU 56 transmits the jackpot start 3 designation command, the jackpot start 4 designation command, or the jackpot start 5 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). Thereby, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the big hit gaming state starts. Next, a value corresponding to a big hit display time (a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred, for example, in the effect display device 9) is set in the special winning opening control timer (S453).

  Also, referring to the open pattern data of the big hit stored in the ROM 54, the open frequency (for example, 15 times, 8 times or 4 times), open time (for example, 29 seconds), interval according to the big hit type Open pattern data indicating an open mode such as a time (large winning opening closing time between rounds) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 55 (S454). Among such data, the data of the number of times of release is set in the number of times of release counter for counting the number of times of release in S456. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) (S455), and the processing is ended. As a result, when a V prize occurs in the small hit gaming state, the state shifts to the big hit gaming state.

  If the V prize flag is not set in S448, no big hit gaming state occurs, so the data indicating the big hit type via small hit stored in the big hit temporary type buffer in S81 is deleted (S456), and the special symbol process flag The value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S300) (S460), and the processing is ended. Thus, when the V winning is not generated in the small hit gaming state, it does not shift to the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 101 of the effect control microcomputer 100.

  When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the effect control main processing. In the effect control main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 4 ms) of effect control (S701) ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the effect control main process, when the timer interruption flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703), and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, first, the effect control CPU 101 analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S704). For example, in the command analysis process, when the variation pattern command is received, the command data is stored in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 103. Further, in the command analysis process, when the display result designation command is received, the command data is stored in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 103. In addition, when various effect control commands are received, a flag indicating that the command is received is set. Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process, in order to perform various effects such as effects corresponding to the fluctuation display of the special symbol on the effect display device 9 according to the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S704, of each process according to the control state The process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute effect control.

  Next, random number updating processing is performed to update the count value of the counter for generating various random numbers such as random numbers for selection determination of various effects contents (S706). Then, it transfers to S702.

  In the effect control microcomputer 100, when the fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is started, and when the fluctuation display time specified by the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed, or the symbol confirmation designation command is received. When you do, you stop the fluctuation indication of the production design. By such effect control main processing being executed, in the effect control microcomputer 100, according to the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 and received, the effect display device 9, various lamps, and By controlling the rendering devices such as the speaker 27, etc., various types of rendering control according to the gaming state are performed.

  In addition, in the microcomputer 100 for production control, when the fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation display of the production design is started, and when the design confirmation designated command is received, the fluctuation display of the production design is stopped. It is also good. The fluctuation pattern command is a command including data capable of specifying information necessary for specifying a fluctuation display mode such as a fluctuation time length and a fluctuation display result. The fluctuation display is controlled to be performed at fluctuation time corresponding to each fluctuation pattern command. In addition, the stop symbol when executing the effect control for fluctuating display of the effect symbol is determined based on the display result designation command, based on the determination as to whether it will be out or a big hit.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, after the effect control CPU 101 performs the processes of S500 and S501, the effect control CPU 101 performs any of the processes of S800 to S810 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed.

  In the effect control process processing, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and effects corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol are executed, but synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol The control relating to the rendering and the control relating to the rendering synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol are also executed in one rendering control process. Further, in the effect control process, an effect corresponding to (synchronized with) the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is also executed in a mode that can be displayed in parallel with the fluctuation display of the special symbol.

  Ball hitting promotion effect processing (S500): Based on various effect control commands received from the game control microcomputer 560, the game state is confirmed, and a ball hitting promotion effect according to the game state is executed. Hitting ball promotion effect is an effect of notifying to promote hitting of the game ball to at least one of the first path (left-handed path) and the second path (right-handed path) in the game area 7. Specifically, the hitting promotion effect includes a right hitting promotion notification effect for giving notification to accelerate the game ball being driven to the second route (right hitting route), but the hit hitting promotion effect includes the right hitting promotion. The notification effect and the effect of the left hitting promotion notification for giving notification to promote the hitting of the game ball on the first route (left hitting route) may be included.

  For example, in a specific display area of the effect display device, a character image that promotes and promotes right-handling such as “right-handed” is continuously displayed with a right-pointing arrow image It is done by doing.

  In this embodiment, based on the left hitting as the hitting of the game ball, as the hitting promoting effect, the left hitting promotion notification is not executed, but the second passing based on the state where the right hitting promotion notification is executed. The game ball is driven into the first path (left-handed path) on the basis of a state in which the game ball is accelerated (right-handed) into the hit path) and the right-handed promotion notification is not executed. An example of effect control for promoting hitting is described.

  It should be noted that, as the hitting promotion effect, effect control may be performed in which both the left hitting promotion notification and the right hitting promotion notification are used according to the game state. In addition, as the hitting promotion effect, depending on the game state, it may be effect control to use both the left hitting promotion notification and the right hitting promotion notification.

  Pre-reading process (S501): A process of storing pending storage information (pending information) corresponding to pending storage information possessed by the gaming control microcomputer 560, and making the pending storage information available for prefetch effect. With pre-reading effect, before the order of fluctuation indication (pattern fluctuation) of special symbol based on certain reservation memory information arrives, the contents of fluctuation indication of special symbol based on the reservation information by prefetching the reservation memory information This is a rendering technology such as giving an advance notice at a stage prior to the determination of what will be the variation display of the special symbol in the future. For example, when holding storage information indicates that a small hit or a symbol jackpot will be made, advance notice effect (see FIG. 21) referred to as hold series notification effect can be executed as pre-reading effect. Hereinafter, the pending storage information targeted for the pre-reading effect is referred to as “target pending storage information”. Moreover, the pending display based on the pending information targeted for the pre-reading effect is referred to as “target pending display”.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S800): It is checked whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560 or not. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the variation time effect start process (S801).

  Effect design fluctuation start process (S801): It is controlled to start the fluctuation effect which is the effect corresponding to the fluctuation display of the special symbol. In response to the received fluctuation pattern command, the effect pattern of the fluctuation effect is selected, and the timing of the effect time timer for counting the time of the effect to be executed is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-reproduction processing (S802).

  In process of effect symbol fluctuation (S802): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each state constituting the effect pattern, it is monitored whether the effect time counted by the effect time timer has ended. Then, based on the fact that the effect time is over or the symbol change designation command is received, the value of the effect control process flag corresponds to the change effect stop process (S 803) in order to end the change effect effect. Update to value.

  Effect design fluctuation stop processing (S803): Stop the effect during fluctuation, control to display the effect result corresponding to the fluctuation display result of special symbol (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S804) or the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  Big hit display process (S804): When big hit (1st big hit or 2nd big hit) occurs, control to perform fanfare production as production such as big hit display to notify production of big hit to the production display 9 Perform display control. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (S805).

  In-round processing (S805): Perform display control in the round of the big hit. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post round process (S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (S807).

  Post-round processing (S806): Perform display control between rounds of big hit. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the round (S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  Small hit display process (S 808): When a small hit occurs, a fanfare effect is performed for a predetermined time (for example, one second) as an effect such as a small hit display for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a small hit. Perform display control such as control. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit open process (S809).

  Small hit open processing (S 809): In the small hit, various effects control is performed while the V determination winning device 87 is open. Then, when the V determination winning device 87 is closed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting end effect process (S810).

  Small hit end effect processing (S810): In the effect display device 9, effect control is performed to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Further, in the small hit gaming state, when the V winning of the gaming ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a and it is determined that the V winning has occurred, V prize effect control is performed to notify that the V winning has occurred. When V prize winning occurs in the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display processing (S 804) in order to shift to the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, when V prize winning does not occur in the small hit gaming state, it does not shift to the big hit gaming state, so the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  In the effect control process processing, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled by each of the above-described processes, the variable time effect corresponding to the variable symbol display of the special symbol is started, and the effect result corresponding to the variable symbol result of the special symbol is Is displayed. The effect control CPU 101 recognizes the designated fluctuation pattern and display result for the fluctuation display to be executed based on, for example, the received fluctuation pattern command and the display result designation command, and produces an effect during fluctuation Determine the result. Further, in the effect control process processing, the execution status of the effect control process is confirmed in S500, and a batting promotion effect is executed according to the game control state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of hitting promotion effects including high base state right hitting promotion notification, small hitting right hitting promotion notification, and big hit right hitting promotion notification as hitting hitting promotion effects. The high base state right hit promotion notice is a hit hit promotion effect for aiming the game ball to enter the gate 32 and the variable winning ball device 15 (the second start winning port 14) by right hitting in the high base state. is there. The small hit right strike promotion notification is a hitting promotion effect for aiming the entry of the game ball to the V determination winning device 87 (V prize area) by right hitting in the small hit gaming state. The big hit and right hit promotion notification is a hit hitting promotion effect for aiming the entry of the game ball to the big hit variable winning ball apparatus 20 (big hit opening) by right hitting in the big hit gaming state.

  A high base state right hitting promotion notice, a small hit right hitting promotion notice, and a big hit right hitting promotion notice suggest a right hitting such as "right hitting" and promote a character image along with a rightward pointing arrow image It may be performed using the same image that is displayed continuously. In other words, it is displayed in an unspecifiable state whether the right-handed promotion notification corresponds to any of the promotion notification in the high base state, the promotion notification in the small hit, and the promotion notification in the big hit. Good. Right-handed alerting is a blue-toning for high-base right-handed alerting as an image that continuously displays a character image that suggests and encourages a right-handed, such as "right-handed", with an arrow image pointing to the right. The image may be displayed using a different image, such as displaying as a yellow image for small hit and right hitting promotion notification and displaying as a red image for big hit and right hitting promotion notification. In this embodiment, an example of displaying a blue image for high base status right hitting promotion notification, a yellow image for small hitting right hitting promotion notification, and displaying a red image for big hitting right hitting promotion notification Explain. Further, the size of the image used for the effect may be made different according to the type of the batting promotion effect. For example, the size of the image used for presentation may be made different depending on the degree of advantage to the player. As an example, a small-sized image is used for small-brick right-handed promotion notification, and a medium-sized image is used for high-base-state right-handed promotion notification, and a large-sized right-handed promotion notification. The promotion notification may be performed using the image of. In the high base state right-handed promotion notification, similar to the big hit right-handed promotion notification, the promotion notification may be performed using a large image.

  Next, as an example of the effect in the big hit gaming state displayed on the effect display device 9 when it becomes “design big hit” or “big hit via small hit” based on the winning to the second start winning opening 14, Explain the V combo effect (VCOMBO effect). The V combo effect is performed during a predetermined period between predetermined rounds in the big hit gaming state when it becomes "design big hit" or "big hit via small hit" based on the winning to the second start winning opening 14 The effect is that the number of payouts of winning balls in the jackpot gaming state (balls) is notified at a predetermined stage, and the effect is mainly that the number of payouts of winning balls is divided into multiple times and notified in stages.

  FIG. 20 is a display screen view of the effect display device 9 showing an effect image of a round suggestion effect. In FIG. 20, an example of the round suggestion effect is shown according to the passage of time, and an image having a small relation with the round suggestion effect is omitted. The round suggestion effect is a round in the big hit gaming state to be executed via the small hit end by the display image of the effect display device 9 when it is determined that the big hit in the small hit gaming state by the occurrence of V winning It is an effect that suggests the number.

  One example of the round suggestion effect is shown in FIGS. 20 (A) to 20 (E). In the small hit gaming state, the V determination winning device 87 is controlled to the open state, and the gaming ball can enter into the V determination winning device 87. When a V prize is generated in such a state, a V-shaped V prize image 94 is displayed on the effect display device 9, as shown in FIG. 20 (A). As a result, a V winning notification is issued to indicate that a winning has occurred. The display of the V prize image 94 is continued until the V determination prize device 87 is controlled to be closed.

  As shown in FIGS. 20A to 20E, when the V prize image 94 is displayed according to the occurrence of the V prize, the aura image 95 (95A to 95E) imitating an aura (aura) is a V prize. It is displayed in an effect image-like display manner in which the image 94 is wrapped around. As shown in FIGS. 20 (A) to 20 (E), the aura image is composed of a plurality of colors: aura image white 95A, aura image blue 95B, aura image green 95C, aura image red 95D, or aura image rainbow 95E. It is displayed in the selected color. In the drawing, the color of the aura image 95 is indicated by the color characters in parentheses (the color characters are not actually displayed but may be displayed). As shown in FIGS. 20A to 20E, the color of the aura image 95 can be changed and displayed in a predetermined number of stages such as white → blue → green → red → rainbow in the small hit game. An effect is made such that the color of such aura image 95 can be changed stepwise in accordance with the number of winning on V determination winning device 87.

  During the small hit game, the color of the aura image 95 may or may not change the initially displayed color. The aura image 95 can suggest to the color the degree of expectation of the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state. For the magnitude relationship of the degree of expectation of the large number of rounds, the correspondence relationship of “white <blue <green <red <rainbow” is predetermined. Thereby, the player can recognize the degree of expectation of the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state by the color of the aura image 95. For example, the player can recognize that the number of rounds is more likely to be larger when Aura image red 95D is displayed than when Aura image blue 95B is displayed.

  After the game medium enters the specific area by executing the round number suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 20, the V prize aura image 95 is displayed according to the number of gaming balls entered into the V determination prize apparatus 87. Since the effect mode of the predetermined effect such as the effect is changed, the interest of the game can be improved by the effect without the progress of the game being extended.

  Further, since the round number suggestion effect by the V prize aura image 95 is executed in relation to the effect that the V prize image is notified by the display of the V prize image 94 is executed, the attraction of the game is further improved by the effect be able to.

  Also, since the effect mode (color) of the round number suggestion effect by the V prize aura image 95 can be changed stepwise in accordance with the number of gaming balls that have entered the V determination prize device 87, the round number suggestion effect and V The player can be made to pay attention to the number of gaming balls having entered the determination winning device 87.

  In addition, according to the number of rounds of jackpot gaming state (advantage of the number of rounds) controlled based on that the presentation mode (color) of the round number suggestion effect by V prize aura image 95 is based on V winning in small hitting gaming state Because the player can recognize the number of rounds of the big hit, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by the effect.

  FIG. 21 is a display screen view of the effect display device 9 showing the effect image of the on-hold series notification effect. FIG. 22 is a timing chart of the on-hold series notification effect. With reference to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, the on-hold series notification effect as a special effect will be described. In FIG. 21, (A) to (D) show an example of the on-hold series notification effect according to the passage of time. FIG. 22 shows the effect control timing of the period from the start of the small hit gaming state to the start of the big hit gaming state based on the V winning.

  With the reserve remnant, there is a reserve memory information that will be a big hit in the future in the reserve memory information that exists when the big hit occurs, and existed before the big hit occurrence after the big hit gaming state of the big hit concerned. Consecutive within the range of pending storage information where the next big hit occurs continuously within the range of pending storage information that was present at the time of the big hit, such as the next big hit occurs within the range of the pending memory information We say big hit (pending Uchirenso). The small hit is a small hit via a big hit based on the occurrence of the V prize, so the small hit holding storage information is a holding storage information to be a big hit in the future.

  In the present embodiment, the hold unit determines the target within the hold storage information of the second hold storage information when the big hit occurs in the time saving state (high base state). If the second pending storage information is present, the second pending storage information is given priority over the first pending storage information and used for variable display, so in the time saving state (high base state), the pending storage information of the second pending storage information If there is a small hit or a pattern big hit holding storage information in the inside, a continuous big hit can occur, so these holding storage information is judged as the storage information of the holding series.

  As shown in FIG. 22, after the small hit gaming state is started, if a V prize occurs while the effect of the open process (S 809) in FIG. 19 is being executed, as shown in FIG. 21 (A) and FIG. The effect display device 9 displays the V-shaped V winning image 94 over a relatively short predetermined period. As a result, a V prize notification is issued to indicate that the V prize has occurred. When the holding series effect is executed, the following effects are executed over the small hit gaming state and the big hit gaming state.

  In the small hit gaming state, when a predetermined time has passed after the occurrence of V prize, as shown in FIG. 21 (B) and FIG. 22, the entire screen of the effect display device 9 turns black (dark) and nothing is displayed The blackout display that appears not to be displayed is performed as a basic effect by the open in process (S 809) and the small hit end process (S 810) in FIG. 19. Instead of the effect, it is continuously executed until the end of the small hit gaming state (the first processing of the hold association notification effect). The blackout display may be a visual difficulty effect for changing the visibility of a predetermined image to a visual difficulty state lower than the reference state, or an effect for giving a surprise to the player. For example, the entire display screen is black The image of a predetermined color such as semitransparent black is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the usually displayed effect image (effect image such as effect pattern, character, and background image) instead of being darkened in a single color image By doing this, an effect of lowering the brightness of the image of the entire display screen to darken the image as a whole or an effect of giving a special feeling to the player may be performed.

  And, after the end of the small hit gaming state, the fanfare effect at the start of the big hit which is executed as a basic effect by the big hit display processing (S 804) of FIG. (C) or (D) in FIG. 21 and in FIG. 22 are executed (second process of the informing continuation notification effect). Specifically, in the case where there are three totals of the suspension storage information for a specific symbol jackpot and the suspension storage information for a specific small hit in the suspension storage information, as shown in FIG. 21C, "+3 BONUS" The hold notification is performed by the display of the character. If there is a total of four in the pending storage information, the pending storage information for the specific symbol jackpot and the pending storage information for the specific small hit, as shown in FIG. 21D, the character "+4 BONUS" is displayed. As a result, hold notification is performed. In addition, although illustration is omitted, when there is a total of two holding memory information that is a specific symbol jackpot and a specific small hit storage memory information, the character “+2 BONUS” is displayed. As a result, hold notification is performed. As described above, in the on-hold series notification effect, different effects are executed according to the total number of on-hold storage information that can be a big hit in the on-hold storage information after the big hit gaming state ends, and the number is notified.

  In this manner, the number of pending storage information determined to be a symbol jackpot and the number of pending storage information determined to be a small hit are notified so as to be identifiable in the on-hold series notification effect, so the pending storage is advantageous for the player. By making it possible for the player to specifically recognize the number of pieces of information, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by the effect.

  Such a holding series notification is executed until the specific period at the beginning of the presentation start of the jackpot gaming state, such as before the start of the first round of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. After the on-hold notification is executed, the first round of jackpot gaming state presentation is started by the in-round processing (S805) of FIG. 19, for example, as shown in FIG. 21 (E) and FIG. As described above, the hold series notification effect is executed across the small hit gaming state and the big hit gaming state.

  The blackout display is performed when the on-hold notification information effect is performed for the following reasons. When the on-hold series notification effect is executed, the round number suggestion effect shown in FIG. 20 is not executed. When using the V judgment winning device 87 of the deceleration structure described above, the game ball slowly flows down the passage on the V judging winning device 87, so a total of 10 can be obtained while the V judgment winning device 87 is open with small hits. About at which time of the opening times of the game V winning is generated, and at which time the tenth game ball of the upper limit number, which is the ending condition of the open state, enters the V determination winning device 87 Every small hit occurs a variation. As a result, at the timing when the small hit gaming state ends, variation occurs in each small hit occurrence. As shown in FIG. 20, when performing an effect in which the effect is irregularly changed according to the number of game balls entering the V determination winning device 87, such as giving a sense of discomfort to the player It does not become an effect. However, as the effect display during the period from the start of the small hit gaming state to the end of the small hit gaming state, for example, a narrative in which the effect content changes according to the passage of time, such as reaching an ending after a predetermined period of time If it is assumed that there is a certain effect etc., the effect state at the end of the small hit will be different for every small hit occurrence, etc. There is a risk that the player will have a feeling of giving a sense of discomfort, It becomes difficult to make adjustments to equalize the presentation state at the end of the small hit every occurrence. Therefore, in order to execute the effect of the small hit game so as not to give a sense of incongruity to the player, an effect by blackout display in which the effect content does not change is executed. That is, blackout display is executed as a period adjustment image for preventing the player from feeling discomfort even if the effect period of the small hit gaming state changes. By executing the blackout display as such a period adjustment image, it is possible to suitably execute the on-hold notification effect for the adjustment of the effect period and the like.

  Based on the fact that at least one of the pending storage information determined to be a symbol jackpot or the pending storage information determined to be a small hit is included when a V prize occurs in the small hit gaming state Because the on-hold series notification effect can be executed, the interest of the game can be improved by the effect.

  Also, when V prize winning occurs in the small hit gaming state, V prize notification of FIG. 21 (A) can be executed, and further, since pending series notification effect can be executed, V prize winning in the small hit gaming state The player can be made to pay attention to the effect when the event occurs.

  In addition, at least one of the pending storage information determined to be a symbol jackpot or the pending storage information determined to be a minor hit is included when the V winning in the small hitting gaming state occurs. On the basis of the above, since the on-hold series notification effect can be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the effect.

  Further, in the on-hold series notification effect, different effects are executed according to the total number of on-hold storage information that can be a big hit in the on-hold storage information after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the number is notified. As a result, the player can specifically recognize the number of pieces of pending storage information that is advantageous to the player, so that the interest of the game can be further improved by the effect.

  Furthermore, in the on-hold series notification effect, for example, the total number of suspension storage information that can be a big hit in suspension storage information is “+3 BONUS” in FIG. 21C and “+4 BONUS” in FIG. Whether the on-hold series notification effect is executed in which effect mode by which the special effect performed is different when the number is less than the predetermined number (three, etc.) and when it is the predetermined number or more (four, etc.) Can make the player pay attention to

  In addition, in the reservation series alerting | reporting effect of FIG. 21, the example which performs a blackout display, after performing V prize-winning alerting for a short time was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blackout display may be executed without notifying of the V prize winning. In addition, when executing the on-hold series notification effect, other images such as a predetermined still image or a moving image for which a short-time repetitive operation is performed may be displayed without executing the blackout display. In addition, the blackout display period may be a fixed period. The on-hold series notification effect may be executed until the round effect of the big hit after the end of the small hit gaming state. When the blackout display period is fixed for the blackout display period to be performed during the round presentation of the big hit, the blackout display of the fixed period is executed from the time of V prize, so the black of the period is black. The out display period may be a fixed period, or the end time of the black out display may be indefinite until the round effect of the big hit is reached. Further, the on-hold series notification effect may be executed at the time of V prize winning, or may be executed during the opening period of the V determination winning device 87 after the V prize winning.

  FIG. 23 is an explanatory view showing a data table used when selecting an effect mode of the round number suggested effect. FIG. 23 (A) shows a V aura color change effect pattern table storing a plurality of effect patterns for changing the color of the V prize aura image 95 in the round number suggestion effect. FIG. 23 (B) shows a V aura color change effect pattern selection table used to select an effect pattern for changing the color of the V prize aura image 95 in the round number suggestion effect.

  In FIG. 23A, in each effect pattern in which the effect patterns of the first to eighth patterns are shown, the number of winnings (1 to 10, etc.) to the V determination winning device 87 in the small hit gaming state The color of the V prize winning aura image 95 is set corresponding to each of. For example, in the sixth pattern, it becomes white for the 1st to 2nd, blue for the 3rd to 6th, green for the 7th to 8th, and red for the 9th to 10th, Data is set. The number of winning on the V determination winning device 87 is the total value of the gaming balls detected by the V winning switch 87 a and the V determination winning switch 15 a. The number of winnings on the V determination winning device 87 may be the value of the gaming ball detected by the V determination discharge switch 15b.

  Since the correspondence relationship of “white <blue <green <red <rainbow” is predetermined in the magnitude relationship of the degree of expectation of the number of rounds, in each effect pattern, white → blue → as the winning number increases. A color change pattern is set such that the color can change in the order of green → red. Rainbow color is a color that includes other colors such as blue, green and red. Thus, the player's sense of expectation is held open of the V determination winning device 87 in the small hitting gaming state by the effect pattern in which the expectation of the number of rounds changes to a color with high expectation as the winning number increases. This can be enhanced, and it can be made difficult for the player to feel when the release control is extended.

  The eighth pattern differs from the other effect patterns in that the rainbow color is set for all of the first to the tenth effects, and the color is not changed and is fixed to the rainbow color. This is because the rainbow color is used as a special color which indicates that the small hit via 16 (15) R time minor hit has been established. In addition, as an effect pattern that suggests that the small hit route 16 (15) R time short hit has been decided, for example, even if using an effect pattern whose color may change in the order of white → blue → green → red → rainbow Good.

  FIG. 23B shows the correspondence between the type of the small hit via the big hit and the first to eighth patterns of FIG. 23A. In FIG. 23 (B), for effect control for small hit via 16 (15) R time short hit, small hit via 9 (8) R time short hit, and small hit via 5 (4) R time short hit, respectively. A total of 100 numerical values of random numbers SR2 (numerical range of 0 to 99) for selecting a V combo effect pattern as one of the random numbers updated by the microcomputer 100 are allocated to the corresponding first to eighth patterns, respectively. It is done.

  In FIG. 23 (B), according to the relationship of the degree of expectation of the number of rounds: “white <blue <green <red <rainbow”, “small hit via 5 (4) R time short hit <small hit By the correspondence of via 9 (8) R time short hit <small hit via 16 (15) R time short hit ”, the selection rate of the effect pattern with high round number expectation for the final 10th color is high The data is set to. In FIG. 23B, the eighth pattern is set so as to be selectable only when the small hit route 16 (15) R time short hit. As a result, when the round number suggestion effect is executed in the eighth pattern (the first to tenth is all rainbow colors), it is determined that the small hit via 16 (15) R time short hit is determined by the player It is possible to suggest to The eighth pattern may be made selectable for big hits other than the small hit via 16 (15) R time short hit.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory view of a hold-on notification generation presence / absence determination table. The hold-related notification effect presence / absence determination table is stored in the ROM 102.

  In the holding series notification effect presence or absence determination table of FIG. 24, for effect control for when the total number of holding stations in the pattern 15R time minor hit and small hit via 16 (15) R hour minor is 0 to 4 respectively A total of 150 numerical values of the random number SR2 (numerical range of 0 to 149) for determination of presence / absence of holding notification as one of the random numbers updated by the microcomputer 100 are “execution (execution)” and “execution no (Does not execute).

  Thus, the on-hold series notification effect can be executed for the on-hold storage information that can be a big hit when the big winning opening is opened 15 times. Note that the on-hold series notification effect may be executable for the on-hold storage information that may be a jackpot of another type. In the on-hold notification information presence / absence determination table, data is set such that “execution on” is not determined and only “no execution” is determined when there is 0 or 1 pieces of target storage information. It is done.

  Further, in the holding series notification effect presence / absence determination table, data is set so that “execution present” can be determined when the total number of target holding storage information is two or more, and becomes an object The data is set such that the rate at which "execution" is determined increases as the number of pieces of pending storage information increases. In this way, the on-hold notification information effect is executed according to the number of pending storage information that can be a big hit for the player, such as the symbol 15R hour / day bonus and the small event via 16 (15) R time / day bonus. Since the proportions are different, it is possible to make the player pay attention to how many jackpots to be an advantageous number of rounds will be executed when the hold series notification effect is executed.

  Furthermore, when the on-hold series notification effect is executed, the player can recognize that there is a plurality of pieces of on-hold storage information that can be a big hit, thereby further improving the interest of the game by the effect.

  Furthermore, in the holding series notification effect presence / absence determination table, when the total of the number of holding trains with the symbol 15R time minor hit and the small hit via 16 (15) R time minor hitting among the big hit types is 2 or more, the hold series notifying effect Data is set to run. Thus, the player can store a plurality of suspension storage information that can be a big hit type that is more advantageous to the player due to the large number of rounds among the big hit types when the hold series notification effect is executed. Can be recognized, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by the effect.

  In addition, because the reserve storage information that can be a big hit that has a relatively large number of rounds, such as symbol 15R hour junior high and 16 (15) R hour junior high, is used as an execution target of the reservation series notification effect, If executed, the player naturally increases the expectation of becoming a jackpot gaming state which is most advantageous to the player that the big winning opening is opened 15 times, so that the amusement of the game can be improved by the effect.

  Next, the processing for selection of holding series / round number suggestion effects for determining the presence / absence of execution and selecting the type of effect for the holding series notification effect and the round number suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a holding ream / round number suggestion effect selection process.

  The holding series / round number suggestion effect selection process of FIG. 25 is included in the process of setting various effects in the effect symbol variation start process (S801 of FIG. 19). In the holding series / round number suggestion effect selection process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display result of the fluctuation display executed this time is the small hitting display result based on the display result designation command received at the time of the current fluctuation (display The result may be determined based on the fluctuation pattern command that can be specified (S851). The received display result designation command is stored in a command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 103. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the storage area of the RAM 103 and determines whether the result is a small hit display result or not depending on whether a command specifying a small hit display result is stored in the area indicating the variable display to be executed this time. Determine

  If the small hit display result is not obtained at S851, the process ends. On the other hand, when the small hit display result is determined in S851, the current second hold storage information (presence storage information based on the second start winning to the second start winning opening 14) stored in the prefetch process (S501) of FIG. ) Is acquired (S852). Then, based on the acquired second holding memory information, the presence or absence of holding memory information to be a symbol big hit (the symbol 15R hour and day big hit) to be a target of holding series notification effect is confirmed (S853). The presence or absence of reserved storage information (which may be a small hit via 16 (15) R time short hit) will be confirmed (S 854). Next, SR2 is extracted, and on the basis of the confirmation information in S853 and S854, using the on-hold notification information presence / absence determination table, on-hold notification information effect is executed based on the on-hold storage information in the second on-hold storage information It is determined whether or not to execute (presence or absence) (S855).

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the player is controlled to the small hit gaming state, if the right hitting is performed according to the right hitting promotion notification, the V winning is generated with a probability of about 100% and the big hit gaming state is controlled. As a result, even for the storage information to be a small hit, it is determined as the storage information to be a holding sequence together with the storage information to be a big hit.

  When it is determined in S855 that the on-hold series notification effect is determined, the on-hold series notification effect information (for example, notification target on-hold) which is data to be used when executing on-hold series notification effect corresponding to the current fluctuation display. The number of links, presence / absence of execution of pending notification information, and the like are stored in a predetermined effect data storage area (S857), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S855 that the on-hold series notification effect is not to be executed, it is determined to execute the round suggestion effect (color change effect of the aura image) (S858). Next, the type of small hit via big hit is confirmed based on the display result designation command confirmed in S851, and SR3 is extracted and executed using the V aura color change effect pattern selection table of FIG. 23 (B). The presentation pattern of the round suggestion presentation is selected and determined (S 859). Then, as the data to be used when performing the round suggestion effect with the decided effect pattern, the effect pattern data stored in the V-Aura color change effect pattern table is stored as shown in FIG. The effect information (for example, the number-of-rounds suggested effect pattern, the presence or absence of the number-of-rounds suggested effects, etc.) is stored in a specific effect data storage area (S860), and the process is ended.

  When it is determined that the on-hold series notification effect is to be performed when the variable display is the small hit display result, the on-hold series notification effect is executed based on the data stored in S857. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold-on notification effect is not performed when the variable display results in a small hit display result, a round number suggestion effect is performed based on the data stored in S860. In the case of a pachinko gaming machine which does not have a holding series notification effect, S858 may be executed after S855.

  Note that the round number suggestion effect may be performed also when the on-hold series notification effect is performed. In addition, it is decided whether the number-of-rounds suggestion effect is to be executed by a predetermined lottery when the on-hold series informing effect is not performed, not necessarily on the occasion when the on-hold series informing effect is not performed. You may In addition, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute the round number suggestion effect by a predetermined lottery, and when it is decided to execute the round number suggestion effect, it is possible not to execute the hold series notification effect. As described above, either one of the on-hold series notification effect and the round number indication effect may be given priority, or both of them may be made without giving priority to either.

  Next, round number suggestion production processing which executes the above-mentioned round number suggestion production is explained. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a round number suggestion effect process. The number-of-rounds suggestion effect process of FIG. 26 is configured and executed as a part of the process (S809 in FIG. 19) of the small hit effect during open processing.

  In the number-of-rounds suggestion effect process, first, the number-of-rounds suggestion effect information (round number suggestion effect pattern, presence or absence of execution of the round number suggestive effect, etc.) stored in S860 of FIG. 25 is acquired (S840). Next, based on the information on the presence or absence of the execution of the round number suggestion effect acquired in S840, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the round number suggestion effect is to be performed (S841). If it is determined in S841 that the number-of-rounds suggestion effect is not determined, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S841 that the number-of-rounds suggestion effect is determined, it is at the time of reception of the V identification winning ball detection designation command which is output when the gaming ball entering the V determination winning device 87 is detected. Whether or not it is confirmed (S842).

  If it is not the time of command reception in S842, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is time to receive a command in S842, the winning number counter as counting means for counting the gaming balls entering the V determination winning device 87 is incremented by +1 (S843). Then, the aura image 95 is displayed in a color corresponding to the number counted by the updated winning number counter based on the effect pattern of the round number suggestion effect acquired in S 840 (S 843). By displaying the aura image 95 in the color corresponding to the number in S843, the number-of-rounds suggestion effect in which the color of the aura image 95 can be changed according to the number of gaming balls entering the V determination winning device 87 is executed. It will be. The V prize image 94 is displayed on the basis of the V prize designation command received in the small hit effect open process (S 809), and when the V prize occurs, the V specified prize ball is immediately after it. Since the detection designation command is received, the aura image 95 corresponding to the V prize image 94 is displayed immediately after the V prize occurrence in the color determined in S844 in S843. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 20 (A) to 20 (E), the round number suggestion effect that the color of the aura image 95 can be changed is executed.

  Next, a first process of the hold series notification effect which executes the above-described hold series notification effect during the small hit game will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the on-hold series notification effect first process. The holding series notification effect first processing of FIG. 27 is configured and executed as a part of processing during open processing of the small hit effect (S 809 of FIG. 19).

  In the on-hold series notification effect first process, first, on-hold series notification effect information (the number of notification target on-off series, presence or absence of on-hold series notification effect, etc.) stored in S857 of FIG. 25 is acquired (S861). Next, based on the information on the presence or absence of the execution of the on-hold series notification effect acquired in S861, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the on-hold series notification effect is to be performed (S862). If it is determined in S862 that the on-hold series notification effect has not been determined, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S862 that the holding series notification effect is determined to be executed, the V prize is transmitted when the V prize ball to V prize area 870 of V determination prize device 87 is detected by V prize switch 87a. It is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed after the detection designation command is received (S863).

  If it is determined in S863 that the predetermined period has not elapsed after the reception of the V prize detection designation command, the process ends. On the other hand, when the predetermined period has elapsed since the reception of the V prize detection designation command in S863, based on the information on the number of notification target pending trains acquired in S861, the small hit effect open process (S809) and the small hit The blackout display, which is executed until the end processing (S810) is ended, is started (S864), and the processing is ended. As a result, the blackout display as shown in FIG. 21B is executed until the end of the small hit game.

  Next, the second process of the holding series notification effect executed during the big hit display of the above-mentioned holding series notification effect will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the on-hold series notification effect second process. The second process of holding association notification effect of FIG. 28 is configured and executed as a part of the process of the big hit display process (S804 of FIG. 19) of the big hit effect.

  In the holding series notification production second process, first, the holding series notification effect information (the number of notification target holding series, the presence or absence of execution of the holding series notification production, and the like) stored in S857 of FIG. 25 is acquired (S871). Next, based on the information on the presence or absence of the execution of the on-hold series notification effect acquired in S871, it is checked whether or not it is determined that the on-hold series notification effect is to be performed (S872). If it is determined in S872 that the on-hold series notification effect has not been determined, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S872 that the holding series notification effect is determined to be performed, +2 BONUS (in the case of the target holding series number 2 as the holding series notification mode based on the information on the number of notification target holding series acquired in S871 ), +3 BONUS (in the case of 3 target pending station numbers), or +4 B ONUS (in the case of 4 target pending station numbers) are selected (S873). Then, in the on-hold notification mode selected in S873, the execution of on-hold notification, which is executed over a predetermined period of during the big hit display effect period, is started. As a result, for example, the hold series notification as shown in FIGS. 21 (C) and (D) is executed.

[Modification to perform on-hold notification effect by V winning image aura color]
Next, a modified example will be described in which the on-hold notification effect is performed in the V winning image aura color. In FIG. 21, the example which performs reservation series alerting | reporting effect by character information like "+3 BONUS" was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the on-hold notification information effect may be performed using an aura image 95 capable of color change as shown in FIG.

  As the hold series notification effect using the aura image 95, the aura image 95 displayed along with the V prize image 94 is displayed, for example, as the number of gaming balls entering the V determination prize apparatus 87 increases, as shown in FIG. As described above, the color of the aura image 95 may be changed to make the color of the aura image 95 be a specific color such as a rainbow as the above-described hold notification. Such a holding series notification effect displays an aura image based on the holding memory information including at least one of holding memory information for becoming a big hit and holding memory information for becoming a small hit. It is sufficient to execute the on-hold series notification effect by making it possible to change the effect mode of such a predetermined effect to a specific mode.

  If such a holding series notification effect is executed, the aura is based on the holding memory information including at least one of the holding memory information for a big hit and the holding memory information for a small hit. Since the effect mode of the effect of displaying the image can be changed to the specific mode, it is possible for the player to recognize that the suspension memory information includes suspension memory information to be a big hit via a symbol jackpot or a small hit via a small hit. Thus, the attraction of the game can be further improved by the effect.

[Modification of production mode change of pending announcement information effect]
Next, when executing a holding series notification effect, only when there is a plurality of total number of holding information that will be a big hit symbol storage and a small hit via a big hit, and only a pending storage information that will be a big hit via a small hit An example will be described in which the effect mode of the on-hold series notification effect differs depending on the number of cases.

  As for the second hold memory information when the big hit gaming state, the case of the first hold series type where only the hold memory information becoming the symbol jackpot exists, the hold memory information becoming the symbol jackpot, and the small hit (small hit via There may be the case of the second pending ream type in which both of the storage information to be the big hit) exist and the case of the third pending ream type in which only the small hit (small hit via big hit) exists. Such plural types of holding series types are all referred to as holding series, but when notifying that there is a holding series as holding series notification effect, holding series notification in a different effect mode according to the holding series type May be performed. For example, in the case of the first holding series type, the holding series notification is performed with katakana such as "+3 bonus", and in the case of the second holding series type, the holding series notification is performed with English characters such as "+3 BONUS", In the case of the third holding series type, the holding series notification may be performed with a hiragana such as "+3 almost". In addition, when notifying that there is a holding link, an image such as characters related to the holding notification may be displayed in different colors according to the holding link type. In addition, when notifying that there is a holding link, displaying a different character image according to the holding link type (a display accompanying the number of holding stations may be displayed or a character image alone may be displayed), the holding notification may be made. You may make it display images, such as a character regarding. Also, for each of the first holding series type to the third holding series type, a presentation mode such as "+3 bonus", a presentation mode such as "+3 BONUS", and a plurality of types such as "+3 bonus" From among the effect modes, the effect mode may be selected and determined by lottery. In such a case, the ratio of selecting the presentation mode to be executed may be different for each of the first holding series type to the third holding series type.

  Since it is possible to vary the effect mode of the on-hold series notification effect to be executed according to the on-time series classification, if such on-time series notification effect is executed, the on-time series notification effect is executed in any of the effect modes The player can be made to pay attention. In addition, for each of the first holding series type to the third holding series type, when making the ratio for selecting the effect mode to be executed to be different, it is a game to which effect mode the holding series notification effect is executed Can make people pay attention.

[Modification to carry out limit control of on-hold series notification effect]
Next, after executing the on-hold series notification effect for informing that there is a plurality of on-hold series, the execution of on-hold series notification effect is restricted until all on-hold storage information targeted for the on-time series notification effect is digested An example will be described.

  In the second hold memory information when becoming the big hit gaming state, when there is a plurality of hold memory information that becomes the symbol jackpot and a small amount (small hit via big hit) of the small storage (small hit via the big hit) If the big hit gaming state for which the holding series notification effect is executed is ended, the big hit that is the target of the holding series notification is executed, and the holding series notification effect is executed even in the big hit gaming state, the holding series Whether the notification effect is continuously executed for the pending storage information of the pending sequence that was made a notification target in the previous big hit gaming state, or for the pending storage information of the pending sequence based on the newly generated pending storage information This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the game is being executed anew, resulting in an unclear effect.

  Therefore, after executing the on-hold series notification effect for informing that there is a plurality of on-hold series, the execution of on-hold series notification effect is restricted (prohibited) until all on-hold storage information targeted for the on-time series notification effect is digested. It is sufficient to execute the effect control to be performed. After the on-hold series notification effect is executed, the on-hold series restriction flag is set until the variable display based on all the on-hold storage information targeted for the on-line series notification is executed, and the new on-hold storage information is confirmed It is sufficient to limit the execution of the effect control process so as not to execute the process for executing the on-hold notification. In this way, after executing the on-hold series notification effect for informing that there is a plurality of on-hold series, the on-hold series notification effect is executed until all on-hold storage information targeted for the on-time series notification effect is digested. By being prohibited, it is restricted to newly execute the holding series notification effect, so it is possible to clarify which holding storage information of the notification target of the holding series notification effect.

  In addition, after executing the on-hold series notification effect for informing that there is a plurality of on-hold series, the execution of the on-hold series notification effect is restricted (prohibited) until all on-hold storage information targeted for the on-hold series notification effect is digested. For example, the following effects may be performed.

  For example, after executing a holding series notification effect to notify that there are a plurality of holding series, the number of holding series is displayed so as to be identifiable by the number of stock images such as icon images etc. The icon image may be reduced each time the big hit gaming state is digested. Furthermore, when the on-hold notification is performed based on the newly generated on-hold storage information, an effect of increasing such an icon image may be performed. As described above, by visualizing the number of notification targets of the holding series so that the player can recognize, it is possible to execute the holding series notification effect that the player can easily understand. Also, if such an effect is executed, after simply executing the on-hold series notification effect, the execution of the on-hold series notification effect is limited until all the on-hold storage information targeted for the on-hold series notification effect is digested Also, the frequency with which the on-hold series notification effect is recognized by the player becomes high, and it is possible to execute an effect that is interesting.

[Modified example of execution timing of on-hold series notification effect]
Next, an example will be described in which the on-hold series notification effect as described above is executed at the time of the V combo effect (VCOMBO effect). The V combo effect is performed during a predetermined period between predetermined rounds in the big hit gaming state when it becomes "design big hit" or "big hit via small hit" based on the winning to the second start winning opening 14 The effect is to notify at a predetermined stage the number of payouts (granted value) of winning balls in the jackpot gaming state, and is an effect of mainly reporting the number of payouts of winning balls in a plurality of times and in stages.

  FIG. 29 is a display screen view of the effect display device 9 showing an effect image of V combo effect. In FIG. 29, an example of the V combo effect is shown according to the passage of time, and an image having a small relationship with the V combo effect is omitted. The V combo effect can be executed by a character effect selected from among a plurality of types of effects such as a first character effect, a second character effect, a third character effect, and a fourth character effect. In each of the first character effect to the fourth character effect, different character images are displayed, and V combo effects of different effect modes are executed according to the type of the character image to be displayed.

  FIGS. 29A to 29G show an example of the V combo effect when the first character effect is selected and executed. FIGS. 29H to 29J show an example of the V combo effect when the second character effect is selected and executed. FIGS. 29 (K) and (L) show an example of the V combo effect when the third character effect is selected and executed. FIGS. 29 (M) and (N) show an example of the V combo effect when the fourth character effect is selected and executed.

  In the jackpot gaming state, whether to execute the V combo effect is determined by the effect control microcomputer 100 by lottery. As the V combo effect to be executed when it is determined that the V combo effect is to be executed by the lottery, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects one of a plurality of character effects from the first character effect to the fourth character effect. A kind of character effect is selected and determined by lottery.

  The V combo effect is performed, for example, in an effect period provided between predetermined rounds (for example, between the fourth and fifth rounds) in the jackpot gaming state. When the V combo effect is executed, a character image "VCOMBO" is displayed as shown in FIG. 29A, and a V combo informing to notify that V combo effect is executed is performed.

  In this modification, about 1000 prize ball payout numbers are scheduled for 9 (8) R hour junior high hits, and about 2000 prize ball payout numbers are scheduled for 16 (15) R hour junior high hits. For both jackpots, for example, a V combo effect is performed between the fourth round and the fifth round. In that case, since the payout of 500 prize balls scheduled as the number of payouts in the previous rounds has been settled, the additional combo ball payouts are calculated based on the number of remaining award ball payouts thereafter. An effect or the like in an effect mode in which information is notified in stages is performed.

  When the first character effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 29B, the first character 9A is selected and displayed, and the execution of the V combo effect is started. When the second character effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 29H, the second character 9B is selected and displayed, and the execution of the V combo effect is started. When the first character effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 29 (K), the third character 9C is selected and displayed, and the execution of the V combo effect is started. When the fourth character effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 29L, the fourth character 9D is selected and displayed, and the execution of the V combo effect is started.

  In the first character effect, a V combo effect for displaying the number of additional award balls is performed as follows. In the first character effect, in addition to the display of the first character 9A, a stick image 122A imitating the stick controller 122 as shown in FIGS. 29 (B) and (F) is displayed and a character image "draw!" By displaying an arrow image 99E indicating an operation direction 99A and an operation direction, an operation promotion display for promoting the operation of the stick controller 122 is performed. The operation prompting display is performed within a predetermined operation valid period. When an operation to pull the stick controller 122 is detected by the tilt direction sensor unit 123 within the operation valid period, “+100” in FIG. 29C or “+400” in FIG. 29G according to the detection. The award ball addition number image 96 is displayed in such an addition display mode. As described above, in the first character effect, a V combo effect is performed in which the number of additional award balls is notified in stages in a plurality of stages in accordance with the operation of the player.

  In the first character effect, at the end of the effect, as shown in FIG. 29G, the prize balls paid out in the rounds (first to fourth rounds) until the V combo effect is executed in the big hit gaming state Total prize sphere number image such as "total 1000" showing the total value of the set value of the number (round number x 1 round number of prize spheres set) and the integrated value of the additional prize sphere number displayed by the V combo effect 98 is displayed. The total value of the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out in the big hit gaming state is notified in advance by the numerical value indicated by the total prize ball number image 98.

  When such V combo effect is executed, the stick controller 122 is operated by the tilt direction sensor unit 123 within the operation valid period in response to the operation prompting display shown in FIG. 29D. When it has been detected, there may be a case in which a holding series notification effect in which a holding series notification image 97 such as “V × 2” in FIG. 29E is displayed according to the detection. In the holding series notification image 97, "V" means a big hit (holding series), and "× 2" means the number of big hits (number of holding stations). When V-Combo effect is executed, it is possible to notify of control to a plurality of holding series in the holding series notification image 97, so it is possible to further improve the fun of the presentation and to further improve the interest of the game. be able to.

  In the second character effect, a V combo effect that displays the number of additional award balls as follows is executed. In the second character effect, in addition to the display of the second character 9B, a stick image 122A as shown in FIG. 29 (H) is displayed and a character image 99B "Press and hold!" And an arrow image 99F showing the operation direction. Is displayed, operation promotion display for promoting the operation of the stick controller 122 is performed. When the operation prompting display is performed, an additional prize ball number fluctuation image 96A imitating an aspect in which the number of additional prize balls is not determined and fluctuates is displayed. The operation prompting display is performed within a predetermined operation valid period. When an operation to press the stick controller 122 is continuously detected by the tilt direction sensor unit 123 within the operation effective period, the additional award ball number fluctuation image 96A is temporarily stopped at predetermined time intervals according to the detection. The number-of-addition-of-balls number image 96 is displayed in the addition display mode such as "+100, +100" in FIG. As shown in FIG. 29I, the additional award ball number fluctuation image 96A is displayed with its position changed each time it is stopped.

  Thereafter, the stick image 122A as shown in FIG. 29 (I) is displayed, and the character image 99A "draw!" And the arrow image 99E indicating the operation direction are displayed, thereby promoting the operation of the stick controller 122. An operation prompt display is performed. The operation prompting display is performed within a predetermined operation valid period. When an operation of pulling the stick controller 122 is detected by the tilt direction sensor unit 123 within the operation valid period, the award ball additional number image is displayed in the addition display mode as shown in “+300” of FIG. While 96 is displayed, a total prize ball number image 98 such as "total 1000" is displayed, and the second character effect is ended.

  When such a V character combo effect by the second character effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 29 (J), in response to the operation of the stick controller 122 being detected, such as “V × 2” There may be a case where a holding series notification effect in which the holding series notification image 97 is displayed is executed.

  In the third character effect, a V combo effect for displaying the number of additional award balls is performed as follows. In the third character effect, in addition to the display of the third character 9C, a stick image 122A as shown in FIG. 29 (K) is displayed and a character image 99C "One strike!" And an arrow image 99E showing the operation direction. Is displayed, operation promotion display for promoting the operation of the stick controller 122 is performed. The operation prompting display is performed within a predetermined operation valid period. When an operation of pulling the stick controller 122 is detected by the tilt direction sensor unit 123 within the operation valid period, the number of additional balls is added in an addition display mode such as “+1000” in FIG. 29 (L) according to the detection. While the image 96 is displayed, a total prize ball number image 98 such as "total 1000" is displayed, and the third character effect is ended.

  When such a V character combo effect by the third character effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 29 (L), as indicated by “V × 2” in response to the operation of the stick controller 122 being detected. There may be a case where a holding series notification effect in which the holding series notification image 97 is displayed is executed.

  In the fourth character effect, a V combo effect for displaying the number of additional award balls is performed as follows. In the fourth character effect, as shown in FIG. 29 (M), after the fourth character 9 D is displayed, as shown in FIG. 29 (N) without requiring the operation of the stick controller 122, “+1000”. The prize ball addition number image 96 is displayed in the addition display mode such as, and the total prize ball number image 98 such as “total 1000” is displayed, and the fourth character effect is ended.

  When such a V character combo effect by the fourth character effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 29 (N), as indicated by “V × 2” in response to the operation of the stick controller 122 being detected. There may be a case where a holding series notification effect in which the holding series notification image 97 is displayed is executed.

  In the V combo effect by the first character effect to the fourth character effect shown in FIG. 29, the total value of the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out in the big hit gaming state is notified in advance, thereby the player's Expectations can be further enhanced. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, in these V combo effects, the player's expectation for the number of winning balls can be enhanced by notifying the number of additional winning balls in stages. Thereby, the interest of the game can be further improved. Furthermore, in these V combo effects, by performing the hold series notification effect in the big hit gaming state, it is possible to improve the fun of the effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, by executing the hold series notification effect, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game after the end of the big hit gaming state. Thereby, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  When it becomes "design big hit" or "small hit via small hit" based on the winning of the second start winning opening 14, as described later, there are times when performing V combo effect and when not performing. When the V combo effect is not executed, the V combo effect corresponding to the execution period is displayed as a predetermined effect in place of the V combo effect image as the execution effect. Further, the predetermined big hit medium image may be displayed when it is desired to execute the V combo effect when executing the V combo effect. As the predetermined big hit medium image in that case, the same image may be displayed when performing the V combo effect and when it is not performed, or different images may be displayed. Further, the predetermined big hit medium image may be different depending on the type of big hit where the total number of balls is different.

  Next, a V lamp suspension series notification effect will be described, which reports a suspension series by changing the light emission color of the V lamp 875 according to the number of V prizes in the small hit gaming state.

  FIG. 30 is an effect explanatory view for explaining a V lamp hold on notification effect. FIG. 30A shows an effect pattern (V lamp effect pattern) of the V lamp 875 in the V lamp suspension series notification effect. FIG. 30B shows a V lamp presentation selection table used to select and determine a V lamp presentation pattern in the V lamp suspension series notification presentation. The V lamp effect selection table is stored in the ROM 102 of the effect control microcomputer 100.

  As shown in FIG. 30A, the V lamp effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns such as a first V lamp effect pattern to a third V lamp effect pattern. The first V lamp effect pattern emits white light when the number of winning balls (V winning balls) winning in the V winning area 870 in the small hitting gaming state is 0 to 5, and the number of V winning balls is 6 or more. It is an effect pattern that emits blue light sometimes. The second V lamp effect pattern emits white light when the number of V winning balls is 0 to 5 in the small hit gaming state, emits blue light when the number of V winning balls is 6 to 7, and It is an effect pattern that emits red light when the number is eight or more. The third V lamp effect pattern emits white light when the number of V winning balls is 0 to 5 in the small hit gaming state, emits blue light when the number of V winning balls is 6 to 7, and When the number is 8 to 9, red is emitted, and when the number of V winning balls is 10 or more, iridescent emission is generated.

  The V lamp effect selection table of FIG. 30 (B) is used for a lottery for selecting a V lamp effect pattern to be executed when executing the V lamp suspension associated notification effect. In FIG. 30B, a total of 130 numerical values of the random number SR4 (numerical range of 0 to 129) for V lamp effect selection as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 100 are the first to the first 1 It is allocated to each of the third V lamp effect patterns. For SR4, in order to clarify the explanation, the number of values of the allocated random number SR4 is shown.

  In the V lamp effect selection table, data is set to have a magnitude relationship of “1st V lamp effect pattern <2nd V lamp effect pattern <3rd V lamp effect pattern” by the value of SR4 extracted at a predetermined timing.

  In the small hit gaming state, when there is no holding link, the V lamp 875 emits light in a mode in which the luminescent color of the V lamp 875 according to the detection of the V prize is fixed to white. On the other hand, in the V-lamp effect when there is a hold in the small hit gaming state, if the light color of the V lamp 875 changes from white to blue or the like according to the number of V winning balls in the small hit gaming state Because there is a notification that there is a pre-read notification at various timings according to the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87, it is possible to further improve the enjoyment of the effect, and the interest of the game is further enhanced. It can be improved.

  It should be noted that V lamp effect can be executed even when there is no holding link, and in the V lamp effect selection table, in the case of holding connection absence, “1st V lamp effect pattern> 2nd V according to the value of SR4 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the magnitude relationship of lamp effect pattern> third V lamp effect pattern is obtained, and in the case of hold-on, “the first V lamp effect pattern <second V lamp effect according to the value of SR4 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data may be set so as to have a magnitude relationship of pattern <third V lamp effect pattern. In this way, in the case of the holding continuation, the ratio in which the first V lamp effect pattern is most selected is high, and the ratio in which the third V lamp effect pattern is most selected is low. In the case of no, the rate at which the third V lamp effect pattern is most selected is high, and the rate at which the first V lamp effect pattern is most selected is low. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation for the holding series by the type of V lamp effect pattern executed in the V lamp holding series notification effect executed according to the V winning ball number in the small hitting gaming state .

  Next, a holding series notification production execution presence / absence decision table used to determine the presence / absence of holding series notification production and a holding notification effect type selection table used to select the type of holding notification effect when the holding notification effect is executed And explain. These data tables are stored in the ROM 102 of the effect control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory view showing a holding series notification effect execution presence / absence determination table and a holding notification effect type selection table. FIG. 31 (A) shows a hold series notification effect execution presence / absence decision table, and FIG. 31 (B) shows a hold notification effect type selection table.

  In the holding series notification effect execution presence / absence determination table of FIG. 31A, the random number SR5 (numerical range of 0 to 149) for holding on / off notification execution presence / absence determination as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 100. A total of 150 numbers of are assigned to "execute" and "do not execute". As for SR5, in order to clarify the explanation, the number of values of the allocated random number SR5 is shown. In the holding series notification effect execution presence / absence determination table, data is set so as to have a ratio of magnitude relationship of “execute> do not execute” according to the value of SR5 extracted at a predetermined timing. In addition, the magnitude relationship of the ratio may be the reverse ratio.

  In the hold notification effect type selection table of FIG. 31B, a total of 120 of random numbers SR6 (numerical range of 0 to 119) for holding notification effect type selection as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 100. The individual figures are the kind of effect performed by V combo effect as shown in FIG. 29, the kind of effect performed by V lamp effect as shown in FIG. 30, and the effect type performed by both V combo effect + V lamp effect, It is assigned to multiple types of effects. Thereby, when the hold notification effect is executed, the case where it is executed only by the V combo effect, the case where it is executed only by the V lamp effect, and the case where it is executed by both the V combo effect and the V lamp effect There is. For SR6, the number of allocated random number SR6 values is shown to clarify the explanation. In the on-hold notification effect type selection table, data is set such that the selection ratio of each effect type is the same according to the value of SR6 extracted at a predetermined timing. The selection rate of each effect type may be different.

  Selecting the type of on-hold notification effect using the on-hold notification effect type selection table of FIG. 31B is also to select the execution timing of the on-hold notification effect. The reason is that the V lamp effect is executed at the timing in the small hit gaming state, and the V combo effect is executed at the timing in the big hit gaming state after the small hit gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (B), as the timing of pre-reading notification, the timing at the end of the state where the gaming ball can enter the V determination winning device 87 like the timing to execute the V lamp effect, and the V combo effect Since at least one of the timings to be executed is determined as the timing of reading and notifying, the pre-reading notification is performed at various timings, so it is possible to further improve the enjoyment of the effect, and further the fun of the game It can be improved.

  Next, a V combo effect type selection table used to select the type of V combo effect will be described. FIG. 32 is an explanatory view showing a V combo effect type selection table. The V combo effect type selection table is stored in the ROM 102 of the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the V combo effect type selection table of FIG. 32, a total of 100 numerical values of random numbers SR7 (numerical range of 0 to 99) for selection of operation effect presence / absence are selected as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 100. The above-mentioned first character effect to fourth character effect are allocated to the above-mentioned first character effect to fourth character effect according to the number of holding stations, ie, the number of holding stations 0 to 4. For SR7, the number of values of the allocated random number SR7 is shown to clarify the explanation.

  In the V combo effect type selection table of FIG. 32, the first character effect to the fourth character are selected so that the selection ratio varies according to the number of holding stations at the time of V combo effect type selection, depending on the value of SR7 extracted at a predetermined timing. The selection ratio of the effect is set.

  When the number of holding stations is zero, the data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of selection ratio such as "first character effect> second character effect> third character effect> fourth character effect". When the number of holding stations is one to three, data is set so as to have a magnitude relation of selection ratios such as "fourth character effect <first character effect <second character effect <third character effect". Then, the data is set such that the difference in the magnitude relationship of the selection ratio increases as the number of holding stations increases (for example, the selection ratio of the third character effect increases as the number of reservations increases). There is. When the number of holding stations is four, data is set such that the selection ratio of “first character effect <second character effect <third character effect <third character effect” is obtained. The fourth character effect is selected only when the number of holding stations is four, but may be selectable also when the number of holding stations is 0 to 3.

  Depending on the data setting of such a V combo effect type selection table, the degree of expectation of whether or not there is a holding train varies depending on the type of V combo effect. This makes it possible to focus attention on which V-combo effect type is used for the V-combo effect type, so that the fun of the effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, by selecting one of a plurality of V combo effects at different selection rates according to the number of holding sessions, the degree of expectation controlled to the big hit gaming state differs according to the notification mode of V combo effects, either It can be made to notice whether V combo rendition is performed in the notification mode of.

  Next, an effect pattern of V combo effect in the first character effect to the fourth character effect shown in FIG. 29 will be described. Here, the effect pattern of the V combo effect will be described using the first character effect as a representative example.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a V combo effect pattern selection table used to select an effect pattern of V combo effect in the first character effect. FIG. 33 (A) shows a V combo effect pattern selection table used at the time of non-selection of the holding series notification effect, and FIG. 33 (B) shows the V combo effect used at the execution selection of the holding series notification effect. A pattern selection table is shown. These data tables are stored in the ROM 102 of the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In each of FIGS. 33A and 33B, a total of 110 random numbers SR8 (numerical range of 0 to 109) for V combo effect pattern selection as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 100. Are assigned to each of the first V combo effect pattern to the fourth V combo effect pattern. For SR8, the number of values of the allocated random number SR7 is shown to clarify the explanation.

  The V combo effect pattern selection table of FIG. 33 (A) is used when it is determined not to execute the hold series notification effect. The V combo effect pattern selection table of FIG. 33 (B) is used when it is determined to execute a hold series notification effect.

  The V combo effect pattern selection table T of FIG. 33 (A) will be described. In the following description, the time of the first operation to the time of the fourth operation indicate the time of the first operation effect to the time of the fourth operation effect in the V combo effect. In FIG. 33 (A), in the first V combo effect pattern, a winning ball additional number image 96 of “+100” is displayed respectively at the time of the first operation and the second operation, and at the third operation, the expected number of winning balls according to big hit types is displayed. The remaining number (9 (8) R time minor hit '+300', 16 (15) R hour minor hit '+1300') is displayed.

  In FIG. 33A, in the second V combo effect pattern, the winning ball additional number image 96 of “+100” is displayed at the time of the first operation to the third operation, respectively, and the expected number of winning balls by big hit type at the fourth operation is displayed. It is an effect mode that the number-of-additions-number image 96 of the remaining number of (9 (8) R time minor hit "+200", 16 (15 R time minor hit "+1200") is displayed. In FIG. 33 (A), the third V combo effect pattern displays the winning ball additional number image 96 of “+200” at the first operation and “+100” at the second and third operations, respectively, and the big hit type at the fourth operation. This is an effect mode in which the number-of-addition-number-of-additions image 96 of the remaining number of scheduled prize balls is displayed (“+100” for 9 (8) R hour minors and “+1100” for 16 (15) R hour minors). In FIG. 33 (A), the fourth V combo effect pattern displays "+200" at the first operation and "+100" additional award ball number image 96 at the second operation, and at the third operation, the award ball according to the big hit type This is an effect mode in which the number-of-additions-number image 96 of the planned number of remaining pieces (“+200” for 9 (8) R time short hit and “+1200” for 16 (15) R time short hit) is displayed.

  Next, the V combo effect pattern selection table of FIG. 33 (B) will be described. In FIG. 33 (B), in the first V combo effect pattern, the winning ball additional number image 96 of “+100” is displayed at the first operation, and at the second operation, the holding notification image 97 as shown in FIG. 29 (E) is displayed. It is informed. As the number of pending stations in that case, the number recognized in the confirmation of the pending storage information is displayed. And at the third operation, the number of remaining prize balls according to the number of winning balls according to the big hit type (“+400” for 9 (8) R hour shorts and “+1400” for 16 (15) R hours big) is displayed. It is an effect mode to be played.

  In FIG. 33 (B), in the second V combo effect pattern, the winning ball additional number image 96 of “+100” is displayed at the first operation, and at the second operation, the holding notification image 97 as shown in FIG. 29 (E) is displayed. It is informed. As the number of pending stations in that case, the number recognized in the confirmation of the pending storage information is displayed. Then, the winning ball addition number image 96 of "+100" is displayed in the third operation, and the remaining number of expected winning balls according to the big hit type in the fourth operation (9 (8) R time minor hit "+300", 16 ( 15) In the R time junior high hit, it is an effect mode in which the number-of-addition-of-balls number image 96 of "+1300" is displayed.

  In FIG. 33 (B), the third V combo effect pattern displays “+200” at the first operation and “+100” additional award ball number image 96 at the second operation, and at the third operation in FIG. 29 (E). Such a pending link notification image 97 is notified. As the number of pending stations in that case, the number recognized in the confirmation of the pending storage information is displayed. And at the fourth operation, the number of remaining prize balls according to the number of winning balls according to the type of big hit (96 (8) at R short) “+200” for short (16) and 16 (15) R for short (“+1200”) It is an effect mode to be displayed.

  In FIG. 33 (B), the fourth V combo effect pattern displays "+200" at the first operation and "+100" additional award ball number image 96 at the second operation, and at the third operation, the award ball according to the big hit type An additional prize ball number image 96 of the planned number of remaining pieces (“+200” for 9 (8) R time short hit and “+1200” for 16 (15) R time short hit) is displayed. Then, at the time of the fourth operation, a holding series informing image 97 as shown in FIG. 29E is notified.

  In the display of the hold series alert image 97 which can be executed with each of the first V combo effect pattern to the fourth V combo effect pattern of FIG. 33 (B), the stored number of hold stations is “× 1”, “× 2”, It is displayed as "x 3", "x 4". As a result, the number of pending stations becomes clearly visible.

  In the reservation series notification selection of FIG. 33B, in the V combo pattern selection table of the first character effect, the execution timing of the reservation series announcement effect is any of a plurality of timings such as the second operation to the fourth operation. By being set so as to be executed, since the prefetch notification is performed at various timings, the enjoyment of the effect can be further improved, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the V-combo effect of the first character effect, an effect of informing the additional number of award balls by the additional award ball image 96 based on the detection of the operation at the time of the operation effect, and the on-hold notification image 97. One of the effects of informing the number of pending stations can be executed by the system. In the V-combo effect, an effect that displays both the prize ball addition number image 96 and the on-hold notification image 97 based on the detection of the operation at the time of the operation effect (for example, an effect of simultaneously displaying these images) May be performed. That is, in the V combo effect, at least one of the winning ball additional number image 96 and the on-hold notification image 97 may be displayed based on the detection of the operation at the time of the operation effect.

  In this manner, in the V combo effect, at least one of the effect of notifying the additional number of winning balls and the effect of notifying of the number of pending stations can be executed based on the detection of the operation at the time of the operation effect. By performing at least one of notification of the number of additional balls and notification of the number of holding stations by the technical intervention based on the operation by the player, the enjoyment of the presentation can be further improved and the interest of the game is further improved. be able to.

  Similarly, with regard to the effect pattern of the V combo effect of the second character effect, the V combo effect pattern selection table is provided by being divided into the execution non-selection of the on-hold notification effect and the execution selection of the on-off notification effect. According to the detection of the operation at the time of the operation effect, at least one of the effect of notifying the additional number of winning balls and the effect of notifying of the number of pending stations may be executable. Also, with regard to the effect pattern of V combo effect of the third character effect, similarly, the V combo effect pattern selection table is provided by being divided into execution non-selection of on-hold series notification effect and execution on-hold series notification effect. According to the detection of the operation at the time of the operation effect, at least one of the effect of notifying the additional number of winning balls and the effect of notifying of the number of pending stations may be executable.

  As for the effect pattern of the V combo effect of the fourth character effect, as shown in FIG. 29, the operation effect is not executed, but at the first effect timing, a predetermined additional prize ball number is notified without the operation effect, and thereafter At least one of the effect of notifying the number of additional balls and the effect of notifying the number of on-hold stations being executable based on the detection of the operation at the time of the second effect timing and the operation at the time of the operation effect It may be done.

  The configuration of [the modification of the execution timing of the hold association notification effect] described above can be expressed as the following configuration.

(1) In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state) in which variable display is performed and a predetermined value (opening of a winning opening etc.) is given to the player. There,
Hold storage means (microcomputer for game control 560, RAM 55, hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing information about fluctuation display not started yet as hold storage information, and
Pre-reading determination means (microcomputer 560 etc for game control etc) which decides whether or not it is controlled to the aforementioned advantageous state concerning the fluctuation indication which has not started yet, and
And an added value notification execution unit capable of executing an added value notification for gradually notifying a value to be provided in the advantageous state.
When the added value notification execution means executes the added value notification (V combo effect such as the first V combo effect of FIGS. 29A to 29 G, etc.), based on the judgment result by the pre-reading judgment means It is possible to execute preview notification (such as hold-on notification effect etc.) for giving notification that control to be in the advantageous state (that there is a hold-on) after the end of the above-mentioned advantageous state of executing the added value notification (FIG. E), (J), (L), (N), microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the enjoyment of the effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
It further comprises operation detection means (tilt direction sensor unit 123 etc.) capable of detecting an operation (operation etc. of the stick controller 122) by the player,
When the value added notification execution means executes the value added notification, it can execute at least one of the value added notification and the prefetch notification based on the detection result of the operation detection means (FIG. 29 (see FIG. A) V-Combo effect of (G) and on-hold associated notification effect, FIG. 33, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, by performing at least one of the added value notification and the pre-read notification by technical intervention based on the operation by the player, the enjoyment of the effect can be further improved, and the fun of the game can be reduced. It can be further improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
When the value added notification execution means executes the value added notification, the pre-reading determination means determines that the value addition notification is to be controlled in a plurality of advantageous states after the end of the advantageous state of executing the value added notification. When there is, it is possible to notify that control to the above-mentioned advantageous state a plurality of times in the pre-read notification (such as “V × 2” in the hold series alert image 97 at the hold series alert effect of FIG. It is possible to report the number of pending stations more than once, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the enjoyment of the effect by being able to notify that it is controlled to a plurality of advantageous states in the advance notification when executing the added value notification Interest can be further improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
The said added value notification execution means,
The value added notification can be executed in the notification mode selected from a plurality of types of notification modes (the first to fourth character effects in FIG. 32, etc.) (selectable in the V combo effect type selection table in FIG. 32, etc.) ,
When it is determined by the pre-reading determination means that the value addition notification is to be controlled to a plurality of advantageous conditions after the end of the advantageous condition executing the value addition notification, when the value addition notification is performed, One of the notification modes is selected from the plurality of types of notification modes at different selection rates according to the number of times controlled (in the V combo effect type selection table of FIG. Data is set to etc.).

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined by the pre-reading determination means that control is performed in a plurality of advantageous states, any of the plurality of types of notification modes can be selected at different selection rates according to the number of times of control in the advantageous states. Since the degree of expectation controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the notification mode by selecting the notification mode, it can be made to pay attention to which notification mode is to be used to give a value notification. As a result, the enjoyment of the presentation can be further improved, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
The added value notification execution means can execute the prefetch notification at at least one of a plurality of timings when executing the added value notification (at the time of holding series notification of FIG. 33 (B) In the V character combo pattern selection table of the first character effect, the execution timing of the hold series notification effect is set to be executed at any one of a plurality of timings such as the time of the first operation to the time of the fourth operation.) .

  According to such a configuration, when the added value notification is performed, the read-ahead notification is performed at at least one of a plurality of timings, so that the read-ahead notification is performed at various timings. The interest of the game can be further improved, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
The first variation display means (the first special symbol display 8a etc.) which performs the first variation display (the variation display of the first special symbol) and derives and displays the display result,
The second variation display means (the second special symbol display 8b etc.) which performs the second variation display (the variation display of the second special symbol) and derives and displays the display result,
Specific state control means for controlling the specific state (big hit gaming state) when the display result in any of the first change display means and the second change display means becomes a specific display result (such as a big hit display result) Microcomputer 560 for game control, etc.)
The apparatus further comprises predetermined state control means for controlling to a predetermined state (small hit gaming state) when at least a display result in the second variation display means becomes a predetermined display result (small hit display result etc.),
The advantageous state includes the specific state and the predetermined state,
Variable winning means (V determination winning device 87, etc.) capable of winning a game medium (game ball) in the predetermined state;
It further comprises a specific area (V prize area 870, etc.) provided in the variable winning means and to which game media can enter.
Even when gaming media enter the specific area in the predetermined state, control to the specific state is performed,
The storage means is
A first hold storage unit (such as a first hold storage buffer) that stores information on the first variable display that has not been started yet as hold storage information;
And second holding storage means (such as a first holding storage buffer) for storing information on the second variable display not yet started as holding storage information,
The added value notification execution means is responsive to the number of game media that has entered the variable winning means (in the small hit gaming state) when the display result of the second variable display becomes a predetermined display result (small hit display result) It is possible to execute the pre-read notification (such as a hold series notification effect in which the light emission color of the V lamp 875 is changed in accordance with the V prize number in the V lamp effect patterns of FIGS. 30A and 30B).

  According to such a configuration, when carrying out the added value notification, the prefetch notification is given at various timings according to the number of game media that has entered the variable winning means, so that the enjoyment of the effect can be further improved. , Can further improve the interest of the game.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
The first variation display means (the first special symbol display 8a etc.) which performs the first variation display (the variation display of the first special symbol) and derives and displays the display result,
The second variation display means (the second special symbol display 8b etc.) which performs the second variation display (the variation display of the second special symbol) and derives and displays the display result,
Specific state control means for controlling to a specific state when the display result in any of the first change display means and the second change display means becomes a specific display result;
The apparatus further comprises predetermined state control means (microcomputer for game control 560 etc.) for controlling to a predetermined state when at least the display result in the second variation display means becomes a predetermined display result (small hit display result),
The advantageous state includes the specific state and the predetermined state,
Variable winning means (V-determination winning device 87 etc.) capable of winning game media in the predetermined state;
It further comprises a specific area provided in the variable winning means and to which game media (game balls) can enter.
Even when a game medium enters the specific area (V pay area 870 or the like) in the predetermined state, control is made to the specific state,
The storage means is
A first hold storage unit (such as a first hold storage buffer) that stores information on the first variable display that has not been started yet as hold storage information;
And second holding storage means (such as a first holding storage buffer) for storing information on the second variable display not yet started as holding storage information,
Notification timing decision to determine the timing (the timing at the time of V combo effect, the timing at the time of V lamp effect, both the timing at the time of V combo effect and V lamp effect) of the pre-read notification executed by the added value notification execution means Further comprising means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.),
When the display result of the second variable display becomes the predetermined display result, the notification timing determination means determines the timing when the state where the game medium can enter the variable winning means ends (small hit open processing-small At least one of the timing at which the V lamp effect is produced until the hit end effect processing and the timing at which the value added notification is executed in the advantageous state (timing at the V combo effect during the big hit display processing) The timing is determined as the timing of the pre-read notification (the reservation series notification effect type selection table of FIG. 31B, S855 of FIG. 22).

  According to such a configuration, at least one of the timing at the end of the state in which the game media can enter the variable winning means and the timing at the time of executing the value-added notification in the advantageous state as the timing of the advance notification. Since one of the timings is determined as the timing of the reading and notification, since the pre-reading notification is performed at various timings, it is possible to further improve the enjoyment of the effect and to further improve the interest of the game.

Next, main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) After the game medium enters the specific area by executing the round number suggestive effect as shown in FIG. 20, the V prize aura image 95 according to the number of game balls entered into the V determination prize apparatus 87. Since the effect mode of the predetermined effect such as the effect of displaying the is changed, the interest of the game can be improved by the effect without the progress of the game being extended.

  (2) As shown in FIG. 20, the round number suggestive effect by the V prize aura image 95 is executed in relation to the effect that the V prize image is notified by the display of the V prize image 94 is executed. The interest of the game can be further improved.

  (3) As shown in FIG. 20, since the effect mode (color) of the round number suggestion effect by the V prize aura image 95 can be changed stepwise according to the number of gaming balls having entered the V determination prize device 87. The player can be made to pay attention to the number-of-rounds suggestion effect and the number of gaming balls having entered the V determination winning device 87.

  (4) As shown in FIG. 23, the number of rounds of the big hit gaming state controlled based on that the presentation mode (color) of the round number suggestion effect by the V prize aura image 95 is V winning in the small hit gaming state (round Since it is possible to change stepwise according to the degree of advantage), the player can recognize the number of rounds of the big hit, thereby further improving the interest of the game by the effect.

  (5) As shown in [V- prize image aura color modification to carry out on-hold series notification effect], if on-hold series notification effect is executed, on-off storage information, on-hold storage information to be a pattern jackpot, small hit Because the presentation aspect of the effect that displays the aura image can be changed to a specific aspect based on the inclusion of at least one of the pending storage information that is By making it possible for the player to recognize that the storage information to be the big hit of is included, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by the effect.

  (6) As shown in FIG. 21, when V winning is generated in the small hit gaming state, at least one of the held storage information determined to be a symbol jackpot, or the held storage information determined to be a small hit Since it is possible to execute the on-hold notification effect based on the inclusion of one, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the effect.

  (7) As shown in FIG. 21, when it is determined that a plurality of sums of the reserve storage information determined to be a symbol jackpot and the reserve storage information determined to be a small hit are stored, a plurality of hold notification effects are stored. Since the execution is performed, when the holding series notification effect is performed, the player can recognize that there is a plurality of holding memory information that can be a big hit, thereby further improving the interest of the game by the effect. Can.

  (8) As shown in FIG. 21, blackout display is executed as a period adjustment image for preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the effect period of the small hit gaming state changes. By executing the blackout display as such a period adjustment image, it is possible to suitably execute the on-hold notification effect for the adjustment of the effect period and the like.

  (9) In the holding association notification effect, for example, the total number of holding storage information that can be a big hit in the holding storage information as in "+3 BONUS" in FIG. 21C and "+4 BONUS" in FIG. Is different from that of the special effect performed when the number is less than the predetermined number (such as three) and when the predetermined number is more than the four (such as four), the on-hold series notification effect is executed in any of the effect modes The player can be made to pay attention to him.

  (10) As shown in FIG. 24, according to the number of pending storage information that can be a big hit that will be an advantageous round number for players such as symbol 15R hour big and big hit and small hit via 16 (15) R short and big hit. Since the ratio of executing the continuous informing effect is different, it is possible to make the player pay attention to how many jackpots to be an advantageous number of rounds are executed when the on-hold consecutive informing effect is performed.

  (11) In the holding series notification production presence or absence determination table, when the total of the number of holding trains with the symbol 15R time short hit and the small hit via 16 (15) R time big hit among the big hit types is 2 or more The data is set to run. Thus, the player can store a plurality of suspension storage information that can be a big hit type that is more advantageous to the player due to the large number of rounds among the big hit types when the hold series notification effect is executed. Can be recognized, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by the effect.

  (12) As shown in FIG. 21, based on the fact that at least one of the pending storage information determined to be the symbol jackpot or the pending storage information determined to be the small hit is included, Since the informing effect can be executed, the interest of the game can be improved by the effect.

  (13) As shown in FIG. 21, since the number of pending storage information determined to be a symbol jackpot and the number of pending storage information determined to be a small hit is notified so as to be identifiable in the on-hold series notification effect, the player By making it possible for the player to specifically recognize the number of holding storage information advantageous to the player, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by the effect.

  (14) When V prize winning occurs in the small hit gaming state, V prize notification of FIG. 21 (A) can be executed, and further, since hold series notification effect can be executed, V in the small hit gaming state The player can be made to pay attention to the effect when the winning occurs.

  (15) As shown in [Modification of production mode change of reservation series notification effect], there are a plurality of cases where there are a plurality of total numbers of reservation storage information that will be a big jackpot and storage memory information that will be a big hit via small hit When the effect mode of the hold series notification effect differs depending on the case where there is only a plurality of hold storage information that is a big hit, the effect mode of the hold series notification effect to be executed can be made different according to the hold series type. The player can be made to pay attention to which presentation mode the on-hold series notification effect is executed.

  (16) As shown in [Modification of production mode change of presentation series notification effect], for each of the 1st suspension series type to the 3rd suspension series type, when the ratio of selecting the presentation mode to be executed is different In particular, the player can be made to pay attention to which presentation mode the on-hold series notification effect is executed.

  (17) As shown in [Modification to perform restriction control of holding series notification effect], after executing holding series notification effect for notifying that there are a plurality of holding series, holding that became the target of holding series notification effect By prohibiting the execution of the on-hold series notification effect until all the stored information is consumed, it is restricted to newly execute the on-time group announcement effect, so the on-hold storage information of the notification target of the on-time series notification effect is You can clarify any.

[Other Modifications]
Next, other modifications and feature points are listed below.

  (1) In the embodiment described above, various selection decisions by lottery to execute the effect pattern of the round number suggestive effect may be executed at the start of the fluctuation display change which is a small hit, and the small hit gaming state It may be executed when it becomes.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, as the round number suggestion effect, an example is shown in which the effect mode of the V winning aura image 95 is changed for each entry of the game ball according to the effect pattern determined in advance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined whether or not to change the effect mode (for example, color) of the V prize aura image 95 by lottery at each entry detection of the game ball, and based on the lottery result, the V prize aura image The presentation mode of 95 may be changed. In that case, determination of whether or not to change the color and determination of selection of the color to be changed may be executed for each entry detection of the game ball, and color change is always made for each entry detection of the game ball It is possible to make a decision on selection of the color to be changed.

  (3) In the embodiment described above, an example has been shown in which it is determined that the 16 (15) R time short-time jackpot will be reached when the V prize winning aura image 95 becomes iridescent in the round number suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a presentation may be made such that the V-winning aura image 95 has a rainbow color when there is a held storage information that is a 16 (15) R hour shorts hit and is a held station. In addition, the effect may be such that the V-prize aura image 95 has a rainbow color when there is a reserve storage information which is a 5 (4) R hour-time junior high hit and which is a reserve link.

  (4) In the embodiment described above, an example has been shown in which effects in which the color of the V-winning aura image 95 may change is executed in the number-of-rounds suggestion effect as the predetermined effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect that the V prize image 94 changes from the “v” character to the “W” character may be executed as the round number suggestion effect. In that case, the color of the V prize winning aura image 95 may be changed in the same manner as described above.

  (5) In the embodiment described above, the jackpot gaming state described as the advantageous state is exemplified by an example of a jackpot gaming state in which the variable winning means is opened a plurality of times.

  (6) In the embodiment described above, the effect of changing the color of the V prize aura image 95 accompanying the V prize image 94 is shown as an example of the round suggestion effect, but the invention is not limited thereto. A V prize aura image may be displayed as an image not attached (for example, an aura-like effect image may be displayed at a position away from the V prize image 94), and effects may be made to change the color. Further, it may be determined whether or not to execute the effect of changing the color of the V prize aura image 95 accompanying the V prize image 94 by a predetermined lottery, and may not be executed. .

  (7) In the embodiment described above, an example is shown as a display capable of specifying the sum of the number of reserved stations for the symbol jackpot and the number of reserved stations for small hits, such as "+3 BONUS" as the reserved series notification. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a display may be made such that each of the number of reserved stations in the symbol jackpot and the number of reserved stations by small hit can be individually specified.

  (8) In the embodiment described above, as the effect pattern when executing the round number suggestion effect, the effect data when the number of game balls entering the V determination winning device 87 exceeds 10 is not provided. The effect data may be provided when the number of game balls entering the V determination winning device 87 exceeds ten. For example, effect data may be provided such that the color when the number of game balls entering the V determination winning device 87 exceeds ten is the same as the tenth color. In this way, even when the number of game balls entering the V determination winning device 87 exceeds ten, it is possible to execute the round number suggestion effect without causing a sense of incongruity.

  (9) In the embodiment described above, the contents of the second holding memory information existing when the big hit gaming state occurs are prefetched, and the holding memory information becoming the "symbol jackpot" and the holding memory information becoming the "small hit" An example is shown in which the on-hold series notification effect is executed when either of However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the on-hold series notification effect may be executed only when there is on-hold storage information that is "small hit". The on-hold series notification effect may be executed only when there is on-hold storage information that is “design big hit”.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, the second storage information, which is present when the big hit gaming state occurs, has storage information which is "design big hit", and storage information which is "small hit" For each of the cases where there is a case, there is shown an example in which a holding series notification effect of the same effect mode is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute a holding series notification effect of different presentation modes in the case where there is holding storage information that is "design big hit" and in the case where there is holding memory information that is "small hit".

  (11) In the embodiment described above, the same applies regardless of the total number of "symbol big hit" and the number of "small hits" in the second pending storage information existing when the big hit gaming state occurs. The holding series notification production of the presentation mode may be executed, or the holding series notification production of the different presentation mode may be executed according to the total number.

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, the second hold memory information present when the big hit gaming state occurs, there is only "symbol big hit", only "small hit", and "symbol big hit" In the case where both the small hit and the small hit there is a similar holding mode informing effect may be executed, and in accordance with these cases, a holding series informing effect of a different kind of effect mode may be performed.

  (13) The prefetching of the second suspension storage information for executing the suspension series notification effect may be executed at the start of the small hit or big hit variation display, or may be executed during the small hit gaming state, May run during the jackpot gaming state.

  (14) The V lamp effect to be executed as the above-described on-hold series notification effect may not be an effect that can notify the number of on-hold stations, but may be an effect that can notify on-off numbers. When the number of holding stations is to be notified, the relationship between the number of holding stations and the light emission color of the lamp is predetermined in the V lamp effect, and the number of holding stations is determined by the lamp emission color based on the relation. Notification may be possible.

  (15) With regard to “big hit via small hit”, instead of selecting and deciding the type of big hit when it is determined to be a small hit, a plurality of control patterns such as the number of rounds of the big hit when a V prize occurs You may make it select from a control pattern of a kind.

  (16) The arrangement of structures such as the variable winning ball device 15, the V-judge winning device 87, and the big hit variable winning ball device 20 described in the above-described embodiment is an example, and the following different arrangements It may be adopted. For example, the big hit variable winning ball device 20 may be provided in the right gaming area. Further, a V prize area is provided inside the big hit variable winning ball apparatus 20, and the big hit variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes a variable winning ball apparatus for big hit and a variable winning ball apparatus for small hit as one variable winning ball It may be shared by the device.

  (17) In the embodiment described above, when the gaming ball has won in the V prize area of the V determination prize device 87, the big hit gaming state is shown and only the big hit variable prize ball device 20 is opened. In the big hit gaming state, the V determination winning device 87 may be opened in a predetermined opening mode, or only the V determination winning device 87 may be opened in a predetermined opening mode. .

  (18) In the embodiment described above, an example is shown in which the V determination winning device 87 is always opened when the gaming ball wins in the variable winning ball device 15 when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. Not limited thereto, when the game ball is won in the variable winning ball device 15 when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, it is determined based on a specific lottery whether or not to be in the open state, and the lottery result to be in the open state When it becomes, the V determination winning device 87 may be opened.

  (19) In the embodiment described above, an example is shown where the game ball is controlled to the big hit gaming state if the V winning area in the V determination winning device 87 is won in the small hit gaming state, but it is not limited thereto. Such a game state operation may be executed by controlling the big hit game state in which the same operation as the game state is executed. For example, the V determination winning device 87 is opened in the first round, and the big hit game control of the opening pattern can be executed such that the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. If it is decided to execute such big hit game control by the big hit judgment, such big hit game state is started, V control winning a prize device 87 is opened as control of the 1st round of the said big hit game state In the second round, the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened by continuing the big hit gaming state when the gaming ball shows a V prize in the V pay area 870 in the first round. The following round control is executed to make it appear as a big hit gaming state. On the other hand, in the first round of the big hit gaming state, when the gaming ball does not win in the V winning area 870 in the V determination winning device 87, the big hit gaming state is not continued in the second round after the second round. Execute control to end.

  (20) In the embodiment described above, the gaming machine for paying out the gaming medium to the player's hand according to the occurrence of the prize is described, but the gaming medium is sealed, and the gaming medium is displayed for the player according to the occurrence of the prize. You may employ the enclosed type game machine which adds a game point (score), without paying out at hand. In the enclosed type game machine, a circulation path for circulating a plurality of game balls, which are an example of game media, in the game machine is formed, and a storage unit for storing the game points is provided. Accordingly, the gaming points are added to the storage unit, the gaming points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the firing operation of the gaming ball, and the gaming points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of the winning. Although the gaming machine for paying out the gaming medium to the player's hand according to the occurrence of the prize has been described, the gaming medium is enclosed, and the gaming medium is not paid out for the player's hand according to the occurrence of the prize. An enclosed type game machine that adds points) may be adopted. In the enclosed type game machine, a circulation path for circulating a plurality of game balls, which are an example of game media, in the game machine is formed, and a storage unit for storing the game points is provided. Accordingly, the gaming points are added to the storage unit, the gaming points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the firing operation of the gaming ball, and the gaming points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of the winning.

  (21) Although the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is exemplified in the present embodiment, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is not limited to this, and for example, a value within the range of 0% to 100% Among them, a value including 0%, a value including 100%, and a value excluding 0% and 100% may be used.

  (22) A gaming state advantageous to the player is a state in which the jackpot gaming state, the time reduction state, the high base state, and the probability that the gaming state after the jackpot game is determined to be the jackpot compared to the normal state is high. The gaming state may be any gaming state as long as the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, such as a probability variation state.

  (23) In the operation effect described above, the tilt direction sensor unit 123 capable of detecting the operation of the operation means operable by the player such as the stick controller 122 as the detection means capable of detecting the operation (action) of the player. Such detection means are shown as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other detection means such as the push sensor 124 capable of detecting the operation of the push button 120 may be used as the detection means capable of detecting the operation of the player. Instead of the above-described means, an infrared sensor, and a detection means capable of directly detecting the player's action such as a motion sensor may be used.

  The present invention is not limited to the one described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the embodiment and the modifications described above, and the configurations shown in the later-described form examples and the modifications may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be understood that the above-described embodiment disclosed this time and the form described below are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is also a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing variable display and controlling it to an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. In the variable winning means and (V judgment winning device 87 etc.) which can enter the game medium, the specific area (V winning area 870 etc.) provided in the variable winning means and to which the game medium can enter, and the fluctuation display result Based on the first state control means (microcomputer for game control 560, S305 to S307 of FIG. 10, etc.) to control to an advantageous state (symbol big hit etc.), and to control to the predetermined state based on the fluctuation display result In a state (small hit state etc.) where game media can enter (V win etc.) into the specific area in the variable winning means, based on the game medium entering the specific area in the predetermined state Second state control means (microcomputer 560 for game control, S308 to S310 in FIG. 10, S305 to S307 in FIG. 10) for controlling to an advantageous state (small hit via big hit etc.) and the specific area in the predetermined state The predetermined effect means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, FIG. 26) capable of executing the predetermined effect (effect etc. for displaying V prize aura image 95 as the round number suggestion effect in FIG. 20) based on the game medium having entered. S842-S844, etc.), and the predetermined state is that a predetermined period (period of repeating opening and closing of 0.1 seconds × 10 times, etc.) has elapsed, or a predetermined number of variable winning means are provided. The game is terminated based on (10 pieces etc.) game media entering, and the predetermined effect means is the variable winning means after the game medium enters the specific area. Depending on the number of game media that entered the game, the effect mode of the predetermined effect is changed (as shown in FIG. 24, the number of winnings (1 to 10, etc.) ), And the color of the V prize aura image 95 changes, etc.), and further, a shooting means (for example, a hit ball operation handle) capable of firing game media based on the operation of the player And the control of the progress of the game, and the game state recovery process (for example, Sa9041 to Sa9048 in the game control main process) can be executed when power is supplied after the power supply is stopped. It promotes the game medium to be released to flow down the control means (for example, CPU 90103) and a specific path (for example, right game area 9010R) of the flow-down paths for the game medium to flow down. Display means (for example, effect display device 905) capable of displaying a prompt display (for example, right-handed notification image) for the user and a recovery display (for example, power failure recovery screen) regarding the recovery process; Notification means (for example, a right-handed notification LED 9030) capable of promoting notification to promote firing of game media to flow down the specific path (for example, right-handed notification LED 9030), and transmission from the first control means Second control means (for example, for effect control) for controlling the display on the display means based on the information (for example, the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command in the embodiment and the gaming state specification command in the modification 1) CPU 90120), and the second control means can perform control to display the promotion display together with the recovery display (for example, FIG. 58 and FIG. 6). As shown in the figure, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the right-handed notification processing and the power failure recovery screen display processing to display the power failure recovery screen and the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 905). Be

  According to such a configuration, after the game medium enters the specific area, the effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed according to the number of game media that has entered the variable winning means, so that the fun of the game is improved by the effect be able to. Further, when the gaming state is restored, the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can be reduced.

The predetermined effect may be performed by moving the movable effecter or emitting light from the decoration light emitting means instead of or in addition to the image display. That is, according to the number of game media entering the variable winning means, the movable aspect (the movable range, the movable speed, etc.) of the movable effecter is changed, or the decoration light emitting means according to the number of game media entering the variable winning means The effect aspect of the predetermined effect may be changed by changing the light emission aspect (emission color, blinking speed, etc.) of the above. In particular, if the predetermined effect by the movable effect body or the decorative light emitting means is added to the image display, the interest of the game can be further improved.
In addition, in the case of performing a predetermined effect by image display, the display device that performs the predetermined effect and the display device that performs the promotion display and the recovery display may be the same display device or separate display devices. When the predetermined effect and the promotion display and the recovery display are performed on the same display device, the display means is included in the predetermined effect means. Further, with regard to the variable display, the variable display may be performed on the same display device as the display device that performs a predetermined effect or the display device that performs the prompt display or the recovery display, or the variable display may be performed on a separate display device. You may

  Furthermore, as an example of the form of the gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the effect, and to reduce the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player at the time of recovery of the gaming state. A game machine capable of playing a game using a ball) (for example, a pachinko game machine 901), and capable of firing game media based on the operation of a player (for example, a bat operating handle or a bat launching device) The first control means (e.g., CPU 90103) capable of executing the game state recovery process (e.g., Sa9041 to Sa9048 in the game control main process) when receiving power supply after stopping power supply while controlling the progress of the game. ) And encourages the game medium to be fired to flow down a specific path (for example, the right game area 9010R) of the flow paths through which the game medium flows. A display unit (for example, effect display device 905) capable of displaying a prompt display (for example, right-handed notification image) to be displayed and a recovery display (for example, power failure recovery screen) related to the recovery processing; Are different means, and are notification means (for example, a right-handed notification LED 9030) capable of promoting notification to promote firing game media to flow down the specific path, and from the first control means Second control means (for example, effect control) for controlling the display on the display means based on the information to be transmitted (for example, the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command in the embodiment and the gaming state specification command in the first modification) CPU 90120), and the second control means can perform control to display the prompt display together with the recovery display (for example, FIG. 58 and FIG. As shown in 60, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a right-handed notification process and a power failure recovery screen display process to display a power failure recovery screen and a right-handed notification image on the effect display device 905) the gaming machine It can be mentioned. Below, an example of this embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other embodiments)
Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following embodiment, in the description of each step of the flowchart, for example, a portion described as “step S1” is abbreviated as “S1”. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 34 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 which constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 903 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902. In the game board 902, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device. The front surface of the game board 902 is covered with a gaming machine frame (underframe) 903 by a glass door frame 903a provided so as to be openable and closable. The glass door frame 903a can be opened by a player in the game arcade by inserting an open key into the open lock K and releasing the key, and a general player or the like can not open the glass door frame 903a. It is supposed to be.

  A first special symbol display 904A and a second special symbol display 904B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 34, the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B is composed of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of segments or dot matrix, etc., and includes plural types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure") is displayed variably (variation display). For example, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B respectively change and display a plurality of types of special symbols configured with numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. Do. In addition, the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols, in which combinations of what are turned on and turned off in the 7-segment LED are different.

  A plurality of special symbols are given symbol numbers corresponding to them. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are attached to the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are attached to the symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. In the following, the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display 904A is also referred to as "the first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display 904B is also referred to as the "second special view" .

  The first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B are both formed, for example, in a square shape. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-"), or the type is It may be different. In addition, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating "00" to "99". . In addition, although the form which made the 1st special symbol display 904A and the 2nd special symbol display 904B square shape was illustrated in this example, this invention is not limited to this, These 1st special symbols Each segment which comprises indicator 904A and the 2nd special symbol indicator 904B may be arranged irregularly.

  Near the center of the game area on the game board 902, an effect display device 905 is provided. The effect display device 905 is formed of, for example, an LCD (effect display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 905, for example, three corresponding to the variation display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display 904A and the variation display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display 904B, for example In the effect pattern display area serving as a plurality of variable display units, a effect pattern (also referred to as a decorative pattern), which is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified, is displayed in a variable manner.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R are arranged in the display area of the effect display device 905. Then, in response to any one of the variation of the first special figure in the first special symbol display 904A and the variation of the second special figure in the second special symbol display 904B being started in the special figure game, In each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, fluctuation of the effect symbols (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, when the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special view game, in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R in the effect display device 905 The finalized design symbol (final stop symbol) which is the result of the variable display of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in the display area of the effect display device 905, the variation display using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 904A, or the variation display using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 904B. In synchronization with this, the variable display of a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified respectively is performed, and the determined effect symbols that become the variable display result are derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "derivation"). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as special symbols and effect symbols means to stop identification information such as effect symbols etc (also referred to as complete stop indication or final stop indication) and to end variable display. . On the other hand, during the fluctuation display until the finalized design pattern is derived and displayed after the fluctuation display of the production pattern is started until the finalized design pattern that is the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed, the fluctuation speed of the production pattern becomes "0". For example, the symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion and contraction. Such a display state is also referred to as a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed definitively, it is possible for the player to recognize that the fluctuation of the effect pattern by the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include, for example, complete stop display of the effect pattern only for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion or contraction.

  For example, nine types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “9” or Chinese characters are displayed on the effect symbols that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. The character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, or a combination of a number, English letters, nine character images relating to a predetermined motif, a number or a character or a combination of a symbol and a character image. , A symbol such as a character, or any other decorative image representing an arbitrary figure). Corresponding symbol numbers are attached to each of the rendering symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “9” are attached to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “9”, respectively. In addition, the production design is not limited to nine types, but may be any number (for example, eight types, ten types, etc.) as long as it can constitute an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination or a combination resulting in lost.

  After the fluctuation display of the production design is started, until the fixed production design that is the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed, each of the production design display areas 905L, 905C, 905R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” For example, when the scroll display is performed such that the symbol numbers sequentially flow from the top to the bottom from the one with the largest symbol number to the one with the largest symbol number (for example, "9"). The effect symbol with the smallest symbol number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R (for example, the effect symbol display area 905L of "left", etc.), scroll display is performed from the one with the large symbol number to the one with the small symbol number, When the effect pattern having the smallest number is displayed, subsequently, the effect pattern having the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the effect display device 905, a first hold storage display area 905D and a second hold storage display area 905U are arranged. In the first holding storage display area 905D and the second holding storage display area 905U, a holding storage display is performed to display the number of holdings of the variable display (the number of special map holding storages) corresponding to each special symbol in an identifiable manner. Here, the game ball passes the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B, with the suspension of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol. It occurs based on the start-up winning by (entering). That is, although the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variation display of the special symbol and the production symbol is satisfied, the variation display based on the start condition established earlier is being executed and the pachinko gaming machine When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display is not satisfied because, for example, 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, suspension of the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is performed. The pending storage display in the first pending storage display area 905D is a pending storage display generated based on the starting winning prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and in the second pending storage display area 905U The hold storage display is a hold storage display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening.

  In this embodiment, a circular white display (a suspension displayed on the first suspension storage display area 905D) of the suspension storage display generated based on the startup winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first startup winning opening Memory display), and a circular white display (Hold on the second hold storage display area 905U) of the hold storage display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (enter) the second start winning opening Memory display). In addition, based on the start storage by the game ball passing (enter) the second start winning opening by the holding memory display generated based on the starting winning combination by the gaming ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening The display mode of the pending storage display generated may be a different display mode.

  In the upper right of the effect display device 905, the game ball is turned to the right game area 9010R described later by the operation of the bat operating handle by turning on during the small hit game after the big hit game or after the end of the specific big hit game. A right-handed notification LED 9030 is provided to notify the player to launch. The right-handed notification LED 9030 of this embodiment is turned on / off by the effect control CPU 90120 via the LED control board 9014.

  In the example shown in FIG. 34, together with the first reserve storage display area 905D and the second reserve storage display area 905U, the special figure reserve memory number is emitted in the upper part of the first special symbol indicator 904A and the second special symbol indicator 904B. A first hold display unit 9025A and a second hold display unit 9025B are provided to display the information so as to be identifiable. The first hold display unit 9025A displays the first special view hold storage number in a identifiable manner. The second hold display unit 9025B displays the second special view hold storage count in a identifiable manner. The first special map reservation storage count is the number of storages for which the execution of the variable display using the first special view is suspended. The second special map reservation storage count is the number of storages for which the execution of the variable display using the second special view is suspended. The number of pending storages of the variable display obtained by adding the number of the first special view pending storage and the number of the second special view pending storage is particularly referred to as the total pending storage number. The term "number of Tokushu reserve storages" simply refers to a concept that includes all of the number of first to reserve special storages, the number of second to reserve special storages, and the total number of pending storages, but in particular It may refer to a concept including the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages, but excluding the total number of pending storages.

  Furthermore, right above the first hold display unit 9025A by turning on (emitting light) in the small hit game during the big hit game or after the end of a specific big hit game, the game ball will be described later by the operation of the bat operating handle right A right-handed display unit 9025D is provided to notify the player to launch the game area 9010R. The right-handed display unit 9025D of this embodiment is turned on / off by the game control microcomputer 90100 (CPU 90103).

  That is, the right-handed display unit 9025D is the first special symbol display 904A, the second special symbol display 904B, the normal symbol display 9020, the first hold display unit 9025A, the second hold display unit 9025B, the common view hold display unit It is a part of the light emission means which can notify the information regarding a game by light emission like 9025C. Further, the right-handed notification LED 9030 and the right-handed display portion 9025D in this embodiment are both arranged closer to the right gaming area 9010R than the left gaming area 9010L. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the right-handed notification LED 9030 and the right-handed display portion 9025D without moving the viewpoint when the gaming state is the short time state, the big hit gaming state, or the small hit gaming state. It has become.

  General winning openings 9050A and 9050D are provided on the left and right of the effect display device 905, and general winning openings 9050B and 9050C are provided in the lower area of the general winning opening 9050A. Further, below the effect display device 905, an ordinary winning ball device 906A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The regular winning ball device 906A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 906B has a normally open state (refer to the solid line position in FIG. 34) and a tilted position (refer to the dotted line position in FIG. 34) in the vertical position by the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary motorized part shown in FIG. And a second electric motor-operated part having a movable wing-piece that changes to the second state.

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 906B, when the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric character is in the off state, the gaming ball passes through the second starting winning hole (enter) It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is tilted when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric character is on. It will be in the open state where it is easy to enter. In addition, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the normal opening state, the gaming ball may enter more than when it is in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 906B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening by, for example, closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area is the enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), and the normal open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) or can not pass (enter) Change to

  The gaming ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. The gaming ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the first start opening switch 9022A, and the first special view reserve memory number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " 4 ′ ′) If not, the first start condition is satisfied. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 9022B, and the second special view reserve memory number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " 4 ′ ′) If not, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first starting opening switch 9022A, and the number of the winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting opening switch 9022B. The numbers may be the same or different from each other.

  The game balls having passed through (entered) the general winning opening 9050A, 9050B, 9050C, and 9050D are the first general winning opening switch 9026A, the second general winning opening switch 9026B, and the third general winning opening switch 9026C, shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, which are detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 9026D, based on the detection.

  A special variable winning ball unit 907 in which a first special variable winning ball device 907A and a second special variable winning ball device 907B are integrated is provided on the right side of the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. There is.

  Here, the configuration of the special variable winning winning ball unit 907 will be described. In the following description, the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described with reference to vertical and horizontal directions when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the special variable winning ball unit 907, the left side constitutes a first special variable winning ball device 907A, and the right side constitutes a second special variable winning ball device 907B. A cover (not shown) made of a translucent synthetic resin material is attached to the front side of the special variable winning ball unit 907, and the player can select the special variable winning ball unit through the cover. In 907, it is possible to visually recognize game balls flowing down in the second special variable winning prize ball device 907B.

  The first special variable winning ball device 907A includes a first large winning opening door 90701 driven to open and close by a solenoid 9082 (see FIG. 35), and is changed to an open state and a closed state by the first large winning opening door 90701. Form the first big winning opening. The first large winning opening is formed to open upward at the left of the special variable winning ball unit 907. The first large winning opening door 90701 can slide in the longitudinal direction between the closed position where the first large winning opening is closed by driving the solenoid 9082 and the opening position where the first large winning opening is opened. ing.

  In the first special variable winning ball device 907A, when the solenoid 9082 is on, the first large winning opening door 90701 opens the first large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the first large winning opening (enter) Make it easy. On the other hand, when the solenoid 9082 is in the off state, the first large winning opening door 90701 closes the first large winning opening so that the game ball can not pass (enter) the first large winning opening. As described above, the first large winning opening changes into an open state advantageous for the player who easily passes (enters) the game ball, and a closed state disadvantageously for the player because the game ball can not pass (enter). In addition to the closed state where the game ball can not pass (enter) the first big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) the first big winning opening is provided. May be

  The game ball having passed (entered) the first winning opening is detected by the first counting switch 9023 by passing the first count switch 9023 (see FIG. 35) provided in the first winning opening. . The game ball having passed the first count switch 9023 is guided to the back side of the game board 902 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 902. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the first large winning opening that has been opened in the first special variable winning winning ball device 907A, the other winning opening such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, when the first large winning opening is opened in the first special variable winning ball device 907A, the game ball can enter the first large winning opening, which is an advantageous second state for the player. On the other hand, if the first large winning opening is closed in the first special variable winning ball device 907A, it is impossible or difficult to obtain a winning ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball to the first large winning opening This is a disadvantageous first state for the player.

  In addition, most of the game balls that flowed down without entering the first big winning opening are guided to the normally variable winning ball device 906B by an obstacle nail or the like not shown, and if the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the enlarged open state 2 Start winning prize mouth is supposed to win.

  The second special variable winning ball device 907B shown in FIG. 41 is formed to project upward beyond the first special variable winning ball device 907A, and is opened and closed by a solenoid 9083 (see FIG. 35). A winning opening door 90711 is provided, and the second large winning opening door 90711 forms a second large winning opening that changes between the open state and the closed state. The second big winning opening is formed to open upward at the upper end of the second special variable winning ball device 907B. The second large winning opening door 90711 is between the second state (opening state) in which the second large winning opening is opened by driving the solenoid 9083 and the first state (closing state) in which the second large winning opening is closed. It is provided so that it can slide in the front-rear direction.

  In the second special variable winning ball device 907B, when the solenoid 9083 for the second large winning opening door 90711 is in the on state, the second large winning opening door 90711 makes the second large winning opening open state, the gaming ball is the second 2 Make it easy to pass (enter) the big winning opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 9083 for the second large winning opening door 90711 is in the off state, the second large winning opening door 90711 closes the second large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the second large winning opening. (Do not enter) As described above, the second large winning opening is changed into an opened state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter). In addition, in place of the closed state where the game ball can not pass (enter) the second big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) the second big winning opening is provided. May be

  The game ball passing (entering) the second large winning opening is detected by the second counting switch 9024A by passing the second counting switch 9024A installed in the second large winning opening shown in FIG. . A predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as award balls based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch 9024A. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the second large winning opening that has been opened in the second special variable winning prize ball device 907B, other ordinary winnings, such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example More balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) the mouth. Therefore, when the second big winning opening is opened in the second special variable winning ball device 907B, the game ball can enter the second big winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the second large winning opening is closed in the second special variable winning ball device 907B, it is impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the second large winning opening This is a disadvantageous first state for the player.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in the second special variable winning prize ball device 907B, a gaming ball flow path 90750 is formed in which gaming balls having passed through the second big winning opening can flow down. The game ball flow path 90750 is a main path 90740 (an area along the solid line in FIG. 41) through which the game ball having passed the second big winning opening can pass and a branch path 90741 branched from the main path 90740 (a dotted line in FIG. Region). A backflow prevention member 90730, which will be described later, is disposed between the main path 90740 and the branch path 90741. Further, on the upstream side of the backflow prevention member 90730 in the main path 90740, a first branch portion 90742 is provided where the branch path 90741 branches from the main path 90740, and on the downstream side of the backflow prevention member 90730 in the main path 90740 A second branch portion 90743 is provided where the branch path 90741 branches from the main path 90740. That is, the gaming ball flowing down the main path 90740 is movable from the first branch portion 90742 or the second branch portion 90743 to the branch path 90741 side.

  A third count switch 9024B through which gaming balls can pass is installed at the most downstream part of the main path 90740, and the gaming balls pass the third count switch 9024B, and the third count switch 9024B is used. It is detected. The game ball having passed through the third count switch 9024 B is guided to the back side of the game board 902 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 902. Also, the gaming ball that has reached the most downstream portion of the branch path 90741 is guided to the back side of the gaming board 902 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the gaming board 902 and passes the fourth count switch 9024C. , And detected by the fourth count switch 9024C.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state after the small hitting game is controlled to the big hitting gaming state based on the fact that the third counting switch 9024B detects the gaming ball during the small hitting game to be described later. . Therefore, during the small hit game, while the second big winning opening door 90711 is open, the course of the game ball is changed by applying vibration etc. and the game ball is detected by the third count switch 9024B. Also, since it becomes possible for the injustice to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player, the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment is configured to stop the game in such a case.

  On the downstream side of the first branch portion 90742 in the main path 90740, a restriction member 90721 is provided which restricts and allows the flow of the gaming ball toward the third count switch 9024B. The regulating member 90721 protrudes into the main path 90740 by driving the solenoid 9085 (see FIG. 35), thereby restricting the flow toward the third count switch 9024B in the main path 90740 of the gaming ball. By retracting from the main path 90740, the game ball is provided slidably in the front-rear direction between the game ball and the allowable state which allows the flow down to the third count switch 9024B in the main path 90740 of the gaming ball.

  The upper portion of the regulating member 90721 is formed to be a flat surface, and the flat surface is provided on the main path 90740 so as to form a predetermined angle downward toward the branch path 90741 in a front view. . Therefore, when the gaming ball flows down the main path 90740 while the regulating member 90721 is in the regulating state, the gaming ball runs along the flat surface formed on the upper portion of the regulating member 90721. It is induced to flow downward toward the branch path 90741 via the route.

  Between the main path 90740 and the branch path 90741, the backflow prevention member 90730 is pivotally supported by a pivot directed in the front-rear direction. The backflow prevention member 90730 is a plate-like member whose upper end is pivotally supported by a pivot, and when the gaming ball guided by the flat surface of the regulation member 90721 contacts from the main path 90740 side, it branches off from the main path 90740 side. It can be moved (turned) so as to be able to pass to the 90741 side. Specifically, it is pivotable between a permitted position inclined to open between the main path 90740 and the branch path 90741 and a restricted position closed to between the main path 90740 and the branch path 90741. It is provided. A 90 rib 801 projecting forward is provided above the restricting member 90721, and the backflow preventing member 90730 abuts against the rib 90801 in a restricting position in a counterclockwise direction in a front view.

  In addition, the backflow prevention member 90730 is usually disposed at the restricted position by its own weight, and in the restricted position, the gaming ball guided by the flat surface abuts from the main path 90740 side (right side in front view) The game ball is pushed by the game ball and pivots clockwise in front view with the allowable position as the upper limit.

  At this time, the vertical width dimension between the tip of the backflow prevention member 90730 and the lower portion of the second branch portion 90743 changes to be shorter than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the main path provided with the third count switch 9024B Movement of the gaming ball from the 90740 side to the branch path 90741 side where the fourth count switch 9024C is provided is permitted. On the other hand, when the backflow prevention member 90730 is in the restricting position, the backflow prevention member 90730 abuts against the rib 90801 even if the game ball abuts from the branch path 90741 side (left side in front view). The counterclockwise rotation of the member 90730 is restricted. At this time, the width dimension between the tip of the backflow prevention member 90730 and the lower portion of the second branch portion 90743 is maintained shorter than the diameter of the gaming ball, so the fourth count switch 9024C is provided. The movement of the gaming ball from the branch path 90741 side to the main path 90740 side where the third count switch 9024B is provided is surely restricted.

  Returning to FIG. 34, a normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 34, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of LEDs or the like of 7 segments or dot matrix similarly to the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and multiple types of identification information different from the special symbols The symbol which is a normal symbol (also referred to as "common figure" or "ordinary figure") is variably displayed (variation display).

  Above the normal symbol display 9020, a common view reserve display unit 9025C is provided. The common drawing reservation display unit 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the common drawing reservation storage count as the number of valid passing balls which have passed through the passing gate 9041 by light emission. In addition, the passing gate 9041 is installed between the first special variable winning ball device 907A and the second special variable winning ball device 907B in the special variable winning ball unit 907. A gate switch 9021 which will be described later is incorporated in the passage gate 9041.

  On the surface of the game board 902, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. In addition, winning openings other than the above-described winning openings may be provided. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect LED 909 is provided in the periphery of the gaming area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A, the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the special variable winning ball unit 907, etc.) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 901. At the lower right portion of the gaming machine frame 903 is provided a striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by the player or the like. The hitting control handle may be provided with a single-shot release switch for stopping the drive of the firing motor provided in the hit shooting device or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903 is provided a lower tray for holding (storing) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  A stick controller 9031A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a lower plate member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). ing.

  The upper tray member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 9031B which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the predetermined position (for example, above the stick controller 9031A) on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray main body. Is provided.

  In this embodiment, the gaming area is divided into a left gaming area 9010L on the left side of a center decoration frame and a right gaming area 9010R on the right side surrounding the effect display device 905 disposed substantially at the center of the gaming area. The game ball shot down weakly with the bat operating handle (left-handed) flows down the left gaming area 9010L, and the game ball struck hard with the ball operating handle (right-handed) flows down the right gaming area 9010R It is supposed to be.

  In addition, the game ball which has flowed down the left gaming area 9010L can win the normal winning ball device 906A, the normal variable winning ball device 906B and the general winning openings 9050A to 9050C, and the game ball which has flowed down the right gaming area 9010R is normally A large number of obstacle nails are arranged to be able to win on the variable winning ball device 906B, the first special variable winning ball device 907A, the second special variable winning ball device 907B and the general winning hole 9050D and to be able to pass through the passing gate 9041. It is set up. That is, in the case of left-handed strike, the first special variable winning prize ball device 907A and the second special variable winning prize ball device 907B can not win, and can not pass through the passing gate 9041.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed by the normal symbol display 9020 such that the game ball having passed through the passing gate 9041 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. For example, based on the fact that the normal drawing start condition for starting the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started, for example, the fluctuation display of the previous common drawing is finished after the common drawing start condition for the normal drawing is satisfied. The fluctuation display of the common drawing by the device 9020 is started.

  In the fluctuation display of this common figure, after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, when the predetermined time which becomes the common fluctuation time elapses, the fixed normal symbol which becomes the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per common figure) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variation display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common figure". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7”, for example, as the determined normal symbol, the variation display result of the normal symbol is “general symbol lost” Become. In response to the variation display result of the normal symbol being "per common figure", the enlargement and release control (tilting control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip forming the variable winning ball device 906B is tilted is performed The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  For example, after the first starting condition is satisfied, for example, by detecting the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A by the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. The variation display of the special drawing by the first special symbol display device 904A is started based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the previous special drawing game or the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, the second starting condition is established because the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Later, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied due to, for example, the previous special variation display or the end of the big hit gaming state, the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display unit 904B is started.

  In the variation display of the special figure by the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, after starting the variation display of the special symbol, when the variation display time as the special figure fluctuation time passes, the special symbol of The finalized special symbol (variation display result) to be the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined special symbol, it becomes "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes "small hit" as a predetermined display result. In addition, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is displayed as a final symbol as a final symbol, it will be a "loss".

  After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes a "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as a "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. Ru. After the variable display result in the variable display of the special view becomes "small hit", it is controlled to a small hit gaming state as a special gaming state different from the big hit gaming state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, “7” is a big hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating the number “2” is a small hit symbol, The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as big hit symbol, small hit symbol and lost symbol in the variation display of the special figure by the first special symbol display 904A is different from each symbol in the variation display of the special figure by the second special symbol display 904B. The symbol may be a symbol, or the common symbol may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol in the variable display of both special views.

  After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the finalized special symbol in the variation display of the special view and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit gaming state, the first big winning opening door of the first special variable winning ball device 907A The first large winning opening is opened in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round is performed in which the first special variable winning prize ball device 907A is put into the second state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

  The round, which is the opening cycle of the first large winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “15”, “10”, “5”, etc.). In addition, even before the number of times of execution of the round reaches the upper limit number of times, execution of the round is ended by establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not win at the first large winning opening etc.) It is also good.

  In addition, after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the finalized special symbol in the variation display of the special figure and becomes the "small hit" as the specific display result, in the small hit gaming state, the second special variable winning ball device 907B second (2) The second big winning opening is opened in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. It will be in the state. As a result, the second special variable winning prize ball device 907B is in the second state (opened state) which is advantageous for the player.

  In this embodiment, in the small hit gaming state, the second large winning opening door 90711 is set to be opened once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, but the present invention It is not limited and may be opened a plurality of times in the small hit gaming state.

  In the small hit gaming state, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening passes the third count switch 9024B provided in the second special variable winning ball device 907B, the passage of the third count switch 9024B of the game ball It becomes a "big hit" based on (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 90103 controls the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the third count switch 9024B of the gaming ball. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the second large winning opening in the small hit gaming state passes the fourth count switch 9024C provided in the second special variable winning ball device 907B, it does not become a "big hit". That is, the CPU 90103 does not control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the fourth count switch 9024C of the gaming ball.

  Then, when the game ball is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the passage of the third count switch 9024B, the second special winning opening door 90711 of the second special variable winning ball device 907B has a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds). The second big winning opening is opened in the period until the lapse of a) or the period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second special variable winning prize ball device 907B is brought into the second state (opened state) advantageous to the player. In this embodiment, the second special variable winning ball device 907B is controlled to be in the second state when controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the passage of the third count switch 9024B. The invention is not limited to this, and the first special variable winning prize ball device 907A may be controlled to the second state.

  The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second big winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “15”, “5”, etc.). In addition, even before the number of times of execution of the round game reaches the upper limit number of times, even if the round game is ended by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not win at the second big winning opening etc.). Good.

  In addition, after the end of the big hit game state in this embodiment, time saving control and time saving control are not performed in the time fluctuation control (time saving control) is performed in a predetermined range of fluctuation number of times (for example, 100 times or 20 times) It is controlled to either of the normal state. By performing the time saving control, the fluctuation display time (special drawing fluctuation time) in the fluctuation display of the special drawing is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal gaming state different from a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, and the initialization state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (e.g., initialization processing after power on as in the case of system reset) Control) is performed. In the time-saving control, variation display of a special figure is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times or 20 times) after the end of the big hit gaming state, that the variation display result is "big hit", in the small hit gaming state It may be ended when any of the conditions for the game ball to pass through the third count switch 9024B is established first.

  When time saving control is performed, control to shorten the fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time) in the fluctuation display of the special drawing by the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, or ordinary time Control to shorten the fluctuation time (common drawing fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display of the common drawing by the symbol display 9020 and the fluctuation display result in the fluctuation display of each common drawing as "per common drawing" Control to improve the probability of becoming higher than that in the normal state, and the tilt control time for performing tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normally variable winning ball device 906B based on the fluctuation display result becoming "per common place" The game ball is likely to pass through (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make it longer than when, and control to increase the number of tilting times more than in the normal state, and there is a high possibility that the second start condition is established. Control is performed that is advantageous for the player in Rukoto. As described above, the control that facilitates the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening with the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as high open control. As high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls (including all) may be combined and performed.

  By performing the high open control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the wide open state is increased more than when the high open control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special view game using the second special view in the second special symbol display 904B is easily established, and the variable view of the special view can be executed frequently. Then, the time until the variable display result becomes "big hit" or "small hit" is shortened. The period during which the high release control can be performed is also referred to as a high release control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed. The gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state.

  Various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, an LED control board 9014, and a terminal board (information output board) 9016 as shown in FIG. ing. The pachinko gaming machine 901 also includes a relay substrate 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012. In addition, on the back of the gaming board 902 etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 901, various substrates such as a payout control board, a launch control board, an interface board, etc. are arranged.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board consisting of a function for setting random numbers used in the special view game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012 or the like. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 9011 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and the first special view or the second special view Of the predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 9020, and performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 9020 to control the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 It also has a function to control.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 35, the main board 9011 is provided with a magnetic sensor 9060 for detecting a cheating by a magnet, a radio wave sensor 9070 for detecting a cheating by an electromagnetic wave, and vibration to a pachinko gaming machine 901 Vibration sensor 9080 for detecting frauds such as changing the course of the door, door opening sensor 9090 for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 903a that covers the front of the game board 902 in an openable / closable manner, opening of the first large winning opening door 90701 The first large winning opening door sensor 9091 for detecting the second large winning opening door sensor 9092 for detecting the opening of the second large winning opening door 90711, provided on the path where the game ball flows down to the lower tray Full sensor 9093 for detecting that the game balls are full on the lower plate, a ball for detecting that the number of game balls paid out as prize balls is less than or equal to a predetermined number Re and various sensors such as the sensor 9094 are connected, on the basis of the detection signals output from these sensors, also it has function of determining the occurrence of various abnormal (error). In FIG. 35, the ball breakage sensor 9094 is described as being directly connected to the main substrate 9011. However, in practice, the ball breakage sensor 9094 is connected to the payout substrate, and is connected via the payout substrate. There is.

  The main circuit 9011 includes, for example, a microcomputer 90100 for game control, a switch circuit 90110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 90100 for game control, and a microcomputer 90100 for game control An output circuit 9011 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 to 9083 and an information output circuit 90112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the terminal substrate 9016 are mounted.

  The output circuit 90111 is also connected to a controller 9084 for driving the solenoid 9085. The controller 9084 starts drive control of the solenoid 9085 by receiving an activation signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 via the output circuit 90111 when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated. The controller 9084 drives the solenoid 9085 so that the restricting member 90721 repeats the restricting state and the permitting state every one second regardless of the gaming state.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 is relayed by the relay substrate 9015. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 via the relay substrate 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. In the effect control command, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the effect display device 905, a voice control command used to control an audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, a game effect LED 909 or the like The LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the right-handed notification LED 9030 and the like is included.

  FIG. 36A is an explanatory drawing showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 36A is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for specifying a start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 904A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for specifying a change start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 904B. The command 81XXH is variably displayed on each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R in the effect display device 905 corresponding to the variable symbol display in the special figure game. It is a fluctuation pattern specification command which specifies fluctuation patterns (variation time), such as a pattern. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set in accordance with the content of an instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with the designated variation pattern or the like.

  The command 8CXXH is a change display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a change display result such as a special symbol or an effect pattern. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), the variable display result notification command determines whether the variable display result is “off”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) or Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plural types the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command indicating a result of a prior determination that the variable display result is “off”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type “big hit A”, and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type "big hit B", and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C", and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying of a result of the preliminary determination that the variable display result is "small hit A". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command for notifying of a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "small hit B".

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the fluctuation stop (decision) of the effect symbol in each of the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 905. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designating command for designating a current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with, for example, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901. As a specific example, the command 9500H is set as the first gaming state designating command corresponding to the gaming state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is a game state in which time reduction control is performed (high base state , And the second game state specification command corresponding to the time saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command which designates an occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and a type of the generated error (abnormality). In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 46, the occurrence of any error (abnormality) is determined on the side of the effect control board 9012 The occurrence of the identified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process (see FIG. 59) described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the large hitting gaming state or the small hitting gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after a large winning opening opening that notifies that the large winning opening has changed from an open state to a closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command which designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-decision result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the EXT data to be set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the large winning opening open notification command and the large winning opening open notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state Be done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A and the starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first starting opening winning combination designating command notifying that a first starting condition for executing a special drawing game using a first special figure in a first special symbol display 904A is established. The command ball 200H is that the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred It is a 2nd starting opening winning a prize specified command which notifies based on the 2nd starting condition for performing the special figure game using the 2nd special figure in the 2nd special symbol display 904B being satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first pending storage number notification command for notifying of the first special view pending storage number in order to display the special view pending storage number in an identifiable manner in the first pending storage display area 905D or the like. The command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying of the second special view pending storage number in order to display the special view pending storage number in an identifiable manner in the second pending storage display area 905U or the like. For example, when the first start opening winning combination designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold storage number notification command is transmitted. The main substrate 9011 transmits the effect control substrate 9012. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted when, for example, the second starting opening winning combination designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. The main substrate 9011 transmits the effect control substrate 9012. In the first reserve memory number notification command and the second reserve memory number notification command, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserve memory decreases), It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for reporting the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to notify the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number.

  The command D100H is a V-winner notification designating command for notifying that the third count switch 9024B has been turned on when the player has won the V, that is, the game ball has passed the third count switch 9024B.

  The command D200H is a power failure recovery designation command for specifying that the power failure recovery screen is displayed on the effect display device 905.

  The command D301H is a right turn notification LED lighting specification command to specify lighting of the right turn notification LED 9030.

  The command D 302 H is a right-handed notification LED off specification command that specifies that the right-handed notification LED 9030 is turned off.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main substrate 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data and the like, and a work for game control A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 for executing a control operation by executing a program for game control, and an update of numerical data indicating a random number independently of the CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 to be performed, an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105, and a real time clock (RTC) 90106 capable of outputting time information are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, a fluctuation data write operation in which the CPU 90103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102 by the CPU 90103 Data reading operation to read out the data, a reception operation in which the CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105 Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory view illustrating random number values counted on the main substrate 9011 side. As shown in FIG. 37, in this embodiment, on the main substrate 9011 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 'for determining the special image display result, the random number MR2' for determining the big hit type, and the random value for determining the variation pattern. Numerical data representing each of MR3 ', random number MR4' for determining a common drawing display result, and random value MR5 'for determining an initial value of MR4' is controlled to be able to be counted. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random number values MR 1 ′ to MR 5 ′ may be counted by software update in the CPU 90103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 90104. The random number circuit 90104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 90100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 90100. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  FIG. 38 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "off", the variation display mode is "non-reach" and the variation display mode corresponds to "reach", respectively. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the result is a "big hit". In addition, one fluctuation pattern is prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" or the like. In addition, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "off" and the fluctuation display mode of the rendering pattern is "non-reach" is called non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern"), The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the rendering pattern is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). In addition, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the outlier fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “off”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

  The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach α, normal reach β,... You may provide a normal reach variation pattern of In addition to the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation patterns super reach α and super reach β. . In addition, regarding the special map fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as the super reach α and the super reach β in this embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach β is executed However, the special figure fluctuation time is set to be longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

  In this embodiment, as described above, since the fluctuation display result is "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

  In this embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined in advance, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. From this, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, determination is made using only the random value MR3 'for variation pattern determination without determining these types. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random value MR3 'for variation pattern determination, a random value for variation pattern type determination is provided, and these variation pattern type determination First determine the type of fluctuation pattern from the random number value for the variable, and then execute from the fluctuation pattern belonging to the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type The motion pattern may be determined.

  In the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 and uses the RAM 90102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In addition, the CPU 90103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 9011 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In the ROM 90101 of the microcomputer 90100 for game control, various table data and the like used to control the progress of the game are stored in addition to the program for game control. For example, the ROM 90101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. 39 and the like, which are prepared for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations and determinations. In addition, the ROM 90101 includes table data that configures a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 90103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 9011, and variation patterns of each symbol in the variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. The fluctuation pattern table etc. which store two or more kinds of fluctuation patterns which become are stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 90101 includes, for example, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 39A, the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 39B (for the first special symbol), and the big hit type shown in FIG. In addition to the judgment table (for the second special symbol), the small hit classification judgment table shown in FIG. 39 (D), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the out of line fluctuation pattern judgment A table (not shown), a common drawing display result determination table (not shown), a common drawing variation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. are included.

  FIG. 39 (A) is an explanatory view showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 90101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR 1 ′ is set. In the display result judgment table, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, when the first special symbol is targeted for fluctuation display and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a judgment value for a big hit and a judgment value for a small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (A), when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is not set. Therefore, when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, only the big hit can be won and the small hit is not generated.

  Also, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol Even when the subject is subject to variable display, a big hit occurs with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and half of these judgment values correspond to a small hit By being set as a judgment value, if the second special symbol is subject to variable display, it will win a small hit with a probability (ratio) of 50% (100/200) .

  That is, when the value of MR1 'matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit shown in FIG. 39A, the CPU 90103 determines that the big hit (big hit A to big hit C) is made for the special symbol. If MR1 'matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIG. 39A, it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. The “probability” shown in FIG. 39A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit and the probability (percentage) of becoming a small hit. In addition, to decide whether to make a big hit is to decide whether to control to the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, to decide whether or not to make a small hit is to determine whether to control to a small hit gaming state, the stop in the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 90103 is adapted to determine whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination table shown in FIG. 39A, but the big hit determination table and the small hit determination A table is provided separately, and the determination of the big hit is performed using a common table in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the fluctuation special view designation buffer In this way, the determination of the small hit may be made using separate tables for the case where the variation special feature designation buffer is the first and the case where it is the second.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is not set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is not won. However, a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit may be set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit may be won.

  39B and 39C are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 90101. Among them, FIG. 39 (B) is a case where the jackpot type is determined using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). Table. Further, FIG. 39 (C) shows the case of determining the jackpot type (ie, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed) using the suspension storage based on the game ball having won the second starting winning opening. It is a table.

  The big hit type determination table is a big hit type any of the big hit A to big hit C based on the random number for determining the hit type (MR2 ') when the variable display result is determined to be a big hit symbol. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 39 (B) and (C), three types of big hit from big hit A to big hit C are provided in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) On the other hand, in the big hit classification determination table (for the second special symbol), only one big hit of big hit C is provided. That is, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the big hit that occurs when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed while being one of three types of big hits from the big hit A to the big hit C As a big hit that occurs in, it becomes only big hit C.

  FIG. 39D is an explanatory view showing a small hitting type determination table stored in the ROM 90101. The small hit type judgment table is based on the random number (MR2 ') for the hit type judgment when the variable display result is judged to be a small hit symbol, the small hit type is a small hit A or a small hit. It is a table referenced to determine B. In this embodiment, when the game ball passes the third count switch 9024B during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type big hit D is executed If the game ball passes the third count switch 9024B during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, if a V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type big hit E is executed It has become so. That is, these big hit D and big hit E are not the big hit type determined by the random number value MR2 'for hit type determination extracted at the start winning, but any small hit game of small hit A and small hit B It is a jackpot type determined by whether or not the ball has passed the third count switch 9024B.

  Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described using FIG. 39 (E). In this embodiment, jackpot A and jackpot D in which time saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state as a jackpot type. A big hit B, a big hit C and a big hit E are set in which time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  Among the big hit A to big hit E, the big hit A is a big hit repeated five times (so-called five rounds) of changing the first big winning opening to a second state advantageous to the player. Also, after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot A, time saving control is not executed.

  The jackpot B is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the first jackpot to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit B, time saving control is executed until a special hit game is executed twenty times or until a special hit game is executed twenty times, a big hit occurs again.

  The jackpot C is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the first jackpot to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit C, time saving control is executed until a special hit game is executed 100 times or until a special hit game is executed 100 times until a big hit occurs again.

  The big hit D is a big hit repeated four times (so-called four rounds) of changing the second big winning opening to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state of big hit D.

  The big hit E is a big hit repeated 14 times (so-called 14 rounds) of changing the second big winning opening to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit E, time saving control is executed until a special hit game is executed 100 times or until a special hit game is played 100 times until a big hit occurs again.

  In the time saving state, the probability of "per common" increases, so that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the time saving state, a big hit may occur because a big hit occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a big hit may occur due to the game ball winning a V during a small hit game. It becomes a so-called continuous state which is likely to occur continuously without intervention.

  In addition, in the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit B, since the number of special figure games for which time saving control is executed is set to 20 times, the ratio that the big hit game state continuously occurs without passing through the normal state (The sum of the percentage of occurrence of a big hit as a result of the variation of the special feature game during the 20 special feature games and the percentage of occurrence of the big hit with the gaming ball winning V) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time saving state after the big hit game end of the big hit C and the big hit E, since the number of special figure games for which time saving control is executed is set to 100 times, the big hit gaming state is continuously without passing through the normal state. The rate of occurrence (the sum of the percentage that a big hit occurs as a result of fluctuating display of the special feature game during 100 special feature games and the percentage that the gaming ball wins V and a big hit occurs) is set to almost 100% .

  Although five types of big hit A to big hit E are provided as big hit types in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more types of big hit types may be provided. And four or less may be provided.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 149 within the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 ′ are assigned to the jackpot A And 150 to 249 are assigned to the big hit B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. For this reason, when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol, time saving control is not executed at the end of the big hit game at a rate of 50%. In addition, when time reduction control is executed after the end of the big hit game, the number of special figure games for which time reduction control is performed is determined to be 20 times at a rate higher than 100 times.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 39C, in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), all the ranges (0 to 299) in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment values of MR2 'are big hit Since it is assigned to C, the number of special figure games for which time saving control is always executed is determined to be 100 times after the big hit game is over.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39D, in the small hitting type judgment table, 0 to 99 within the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 ′ is assigned to the small hitting A, and 100 to 299 Are assigned to the small hit B. Therefore, when a V winning big hit occurs during a small hit game, the number of special figure games for which time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game is set to 100 times at a rate of 75%. At the rate of 25%, the time-saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game.

  The ROM 90101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 'for variation pattern determination, and the variation pattern is a plurality of types described above according to the pre-decision result. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hit used when the variation display result is determined to be "big hit" in advance, and the variation display result as "small hit" The jackpot variation pattern determination table used when it is previously determined, and the departure variation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “off” ing.

  In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, each of the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1'-1), the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1'-2), and the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1'-3) A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 'for variation pattern determination. In this embodiment, if the determination value is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and if the big hit type is "big hit A". In addition, since the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it may be the “big hit B” or the “big hit C”. You can increase your sense of expectation.

  In the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is within the range that can be taken by random number value MR3 'for variation pattern determination for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1'-1). It is assigned as a judgment value. In addition, although only PC1'-1 is provided as a variation pattern of small hits in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variation pattern of 2 or more is provided as a variation pattern of small hits. You may do so.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, it is used when the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used when the number of pending storages is 1 or less and when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4. If the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the variation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8, and the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed And the outlier fluctuation pattern determination table D used in advance.

  In the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the non-reach loss fluctuation fluctuation pattern without shortening (PA1'-1), the normal reach displacement fluctuation pattern (PA2'-1), and the super reach α deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2'-2) The super reach β is assigned a predetermined random number value as a judgment value within the range which can be taken by the random value MR3 ′ for fluctuation pattern judgment with respect to the fluctuation pattern (PA2′-3) of deviation. Also, in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, the shortening non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1'-2) corresponding to the total number of reserved memories 2 to 4 and the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2'-1) For the variation pattern of the super reach α (PA2'-2) and the variation pattern of the super reach β (PA2'-3), a predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 'for variation pattern determination can take Is assigned as the judgment value. Moreover, in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortening non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1'-3) corresponding to the total reserved memory number of 5 to 8 and the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2'-1) For the variation pattern of the super reach α (PA2'-2) and the variation pattern of the super reach β (PA2'-3), a predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 'for variation pattern determination can take Is assigned as the judgment value. Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, the shortening non-reach loss fluctuation fluctuation pattern (PA1′-4), the normal reach fluctuation fluctuation pattern (PA2′-1), and the super reach α For the fluctuation pattern (PA2'-2) and super reach β, a predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random value MR3 'for fluctuation pattern judgment can take on the fluctuation pattern (PA2'-3) of deviation. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the fluctuation time of the non-reachout fluctuation pattern (PA1'-2) is shorter than that of the non-reachoutout fluctuation pattern (PA1'-1) without shortening, and the fluctuation pattern is further shorter The fluctuation time is shorter in the non-reach-out fluctuation pattern (PA1'-3) than in (PA1'-2). Therefore, when the number of pending storages increases, the non-reach out of bounds variation pattern is determined so that the variation time is short, so that the pending storage is easily digested and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4 In addition to making a start-up winning when not being held, it becomes difficult to generate a useless start-up that is not made pending storage, and when the number of pending storages is reduced, the fluctuation time is not long and the non-reach is not shifted By determining the pattern (PA1′-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the non-execution of the variable display by lengthening the time of the variable display.

  The RAM 90102 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 35 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source created partially or entirely on a predetermined power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the content of a part or all of the RAM 90102 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). Ru. In particular, at least data according to the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (eg, a special map process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

  Such a RAM 90102 is provided with a game control data holding area 90150 as shown in FIG. 40, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, etc. There is. The game control data holding area 90150 shown in FIG. 40 includes a first special view reserve storage unit 90151A, a second special view reserve storage unit 90151B, a common view reserve storage unit 90151C, a game control flag setting unit 90152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 90153, a game control counter setting unit 90154, and a game control buffer setting unit 90155 are provided.

  In the first special view reserve storage unit 90151A, although the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 906A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs, it has not been started yet The reserved data of the special drawing game (special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display 904A) is stored. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit 90151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning sequence (the order of detecting the gaming balls) to the first starting winning opening, and the first starting condition in passing (entering) the gaming balls The random number value MR1 'for variation display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 90104 etc. by the CPU 90103 based on the establishment, the random number value MR2' for big hit type determination, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 'for variation pattern determination, etc. The reserved data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserve data thus stored in the first special view reserve storage unit 90151A indicates that the execution of the special view game using the first special view is suspended, and the variation display result in the special view game (special view display (special view display It becomes reservation information which makes it possible to determine whether or not to be a big hit based on the result).

  In the second special view reserve storage unit 90151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B and the start winning (second start winning) occurs, it is still started The reserved data of no special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 904B) is stored. As an example, the second special view reserve storage unit 90151B is associated with the reserve number in the winning sequence (the order of detection of the gaming balls) to the second starting winning opening, the second start condition of passing (enter) the gaming balls The random number value MR1 'for variation display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 90104 etc. by the CPU 90103 based on the establishment, the random number value MR2' for big hit type determination, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 'for variation pattern determination, etc. The pending data is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserve data stored in the second special view reserve storage unit 90151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special view game using the second special view is suspended, and the variation display result in the special view game (special view display It becomes reservation information which makes it possible to determine whether or not to be a big hit based on the result).

  The game ball has passed (entered) the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball having passed (entered) the first start winning opening, and the second start winning port. The common hold storage unit may store the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning combination in association with the hold number. In this case, the start information may be included in the hold information indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening has passed (entered) in the hold information, and may be stored in association with the hold number. .

  The common drawing reservation storage unit 90151C stores holding information of the common drawing game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 9020, although the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021. For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 90151C determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 based on the passage of the gaming ball in correspondence with the holding number in the order the gaming ball passed the passing gate 9041 Numeric data indicating a random number value MR4 'for use is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The game control flag setting unit 90152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 90152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The game control timer setting unit 90153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control timer setting unit 90153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 90154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control counter setting unit 90154 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 90154 may be provided with a random counter for causing the CPU 90103 to update a part or all of the game random numbers by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 90154, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 90104, for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 'to MR4' are stored as random count values, depending on execution of software by the CPU 90103. The numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 90103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 90104 or may be extracted from the random number circuit 90104 The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 90155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 90155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 90105 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 35 has an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the effect control board 9012 is provided with a CPU for effect control 90120 that performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 90121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data and the like, and a work area for the CPU 90120 for effect control. RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123 for executing processing for determining control content of display operation in the effect display device 905, etc., and the random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently for the effect control CPU 90120. A circuit 90124 and an I / O 90125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 90121 to execute processing for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 90121, a variation data write operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 writes various change data in the RAM 90122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 90120 in the RAM 90122 Fluctuation data read operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to receive input of various signals from outside of the production control board 9012 via the I / O 90125 for the production control CPU 90120, I / O for the production control CPU 90120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via O90125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

  In the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the effect display device 905, and wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 9013, Wiring for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the LED control board 9014.

  Also on the side of the effect control board 9012, as in the case of the main board 9011, for example, random number values (also referred to as effect random numbers) for determining types of various effects such as advance notice effects are set.

  The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 35 stores various data tables and the like used to control the rendering operation, in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 90121 stores table data that configures a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 90120 for effect control to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, and pattern data that configures various effect control patterns. There is.

  As an example, the ROM 90121 is used by the effect control CPU 90120 to control the effect operation of various effect devices (for example, the effect display device 905, the speakers 908L, 908R, the game effect LED 909, the decorative LED, the effect model, etc.) An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be played, a display screen displayed in notification of various errors (abnormality), an error notification pattern such as a lighting mode of the game effect LED 909, an output sound, etc. are stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content corresponding to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the effect control pattern table, for example, a special pattern change effect control pattern, a notice effect effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like may be stored.

  The special figure fluctuation time effect control pattern corresponds to a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns, in the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the time when the definite special symbol as the special figure display result is derived and displayed Composed of data indicating the control content of various rendering operations such as variable display operation of production pattern, reach production, effect display operation in re-lottery production, etc. or various production display operations without variable display of production pattern It is done. The notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation to be the notice effect to be executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are made up of data indicating control contents corresponding to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  For example, a plurality of reach effect control patterns in which the effect mode in each reach effect is different may be included in the special figure change time effect control pattern, for example, for each change pattern for executing the reach effect.

  The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 35 is provided with an effect control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

  In the effect control flag setting unit, for example, a plurality of types of states that can be updated according to an effect operation state such as a display state of an effect image on the screen of the effect display device 905 or an effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images on the screen of the effect display device 905, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of the plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In this embodiment, in the predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit, the start winning prize buffer for performing the suspension storage display in the first suspension storage display area 905D and the second suspension storage display area 905U is set. The start winning buffer is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of reserved storages in the first special view hold storage. In each storage area, data indicating the presence or absence of the start winning combination (specifically, "0" indicating no start winning combination and "1" indicating a starting winning combination) is stored. The data of these start winning combination buffers are effect control to be described later according to the reception of the first starting opening winning combination designation command and the second starting opening winning combination designation command and the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command. While being updated in the pending display update process (S9072, see FIG. 57) in the process processing, the pending in the first pending storage display area 905D and the second pending storage display area 905U based on the updated data of the start winning buffer Memory display is updated.

  Specifically, when the first starting opening winning combination designation command is received based on the start winning to the first starting winning opening, a round white color is displayed on the holding storage display in the first holding storage display area 905D. When the first variation start command is received based on the fact that the first special figure variation is newly started while the display is newly added, the largest of the pending storage displays in the first pending storage display area 905D is selected. The reserve display is performed so that the high-order (first-time start-up reserve storage) round white display is erased and the other round white display shifts (moves) in a predetermined direction (for example, left direction). Update Similarly, when the second starting opening winning combination designation command is received based on the start winning to the second starting winning opening, a round white display is displayed on the holding storage display in the second holding storage display area 905U. When a second change start command is received based on the fact that the second special drawing is newly added, the top of the pending storage display in second pending storage display area 905U The hold display is updated so that the round white display of the first-time start-up winning storage) is erased and the other round white displays shift (move) in a predetermined direction (for example, left direction). Do.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment will be described. On the main substrate 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process to be a game control main process. As shown in FIG. 42, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 executes the security check process which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid or not, and then starts the game control main process after Sa901. Do. In the game control main process, the CPU 90103 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 90103 first sets interrupt prohibition (Sa901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (Sa902), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (Sa903). After initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), etc.) (Sa 904), the RAM 90102 becomes accessible Set (Sa 905). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in CPU 90103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 90103 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply substrate) input through the input port (Sa906). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 90103 executes a normal initialization process (Sa9010 to Sa9012).

  If the clear switch is not in the on state, whether or not check data is stored in a predetermined backup area is whether or not the processing of Sd 902 and S d 903 in the power failure detection processing (see FIG. 44) described later is performed. It determines based on (Sa 907).

  When backup data is stored, the CPU 90103 performs data check of the backup RAM area (Sa 908). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in Sa 908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power failure detection process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 90103 performs gaming state recovery processing (processing of Sa9041 to Sa9048) for returning the gaming control microcomputer 90100 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 90101 is set as a pointer (Sa9041), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 90102) (Sa9042). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. The processing of Sa9041 and Sa9042 leaves the saved content as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data (special symbol process flag, positive change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), And a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set. Further, the CPU 90103 identifies the gaming state at the time of power interruption from the backup data (Sa 9044), and the identified gaming state is any of the short time state, the small hit gaming state, and the big hit gaming state, that is, the game in this embodiment It is determined whether or not it is in the gaming state in which the ball is hit toward the right gaming area 9010R (right-handed) (Sa 9045).

  When the gaming state specified from the backup data is any of the time saving state, the small hitting gaming state, and the big hitting gaming state (Sa 9045; Y), the CPU 90103 performs transmission setting of the right turn notification LED lighting specification command (Sa 9046 ), The lighting of the right-handed display unit 9025D is started. Then, the transmission setting of the power failure recovery designation command is performed (Sa 9048), and the process proceeds to Sa 9015. If the gaming state is the normal state (Sa 9045; N) in which the gaming ball is launched toward the left gaming area 9010 L (a left strike) (N), only the processing of Sa 9048 is executed without executing the processing of Sa 9046 and Sa 9047. Then proceed to Sa9015. Incidentally, the right-handed notification LED lighting designation command transmitted and set in Sa 9046 and the power failure recovery designation command transmitted and set in Sa 9048 are transmitted to the effect control board 9012 in a command control process described later.

  When the backup data is not stored (Sa 907; N) or when the result of the parity check is not normal (Sa 908; N), the initialization process is executed.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 90103 first performs a RAM clear process (Sa9010). In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number per judgment for normal symbols) is initialized to 0 by the RAM clear process, but it is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number per determination) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 90102. Also, the top address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 90101 is set as a pointer (Sa9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (Sa9012).

  For example, by the processing of Sa9011 and Sa9012, initial value for the flag for selectively processing according to the control state, such as a random symbol counter for determination per normal symbol, special symbol buffer, total prize ball number storage buffer, special symbol process flag, etc. Is set.

  After execution of Sa9048 or Sa9012, the CPU 90103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 90104 (Sa9015). The CPU 90103 performs, for example, processing in accordance with a random number circuit setting program to perform setting for causing the random number circuit 90104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 ′ for special image display result determination.

  Then, in Sa 9016, the CPU 90103 performs setting of a register of CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 90100 so that timer interruption is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 2 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every 2 ms.

  Next, the CPU 90103 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (Sa9018) and the initial value random number updating process (Sa9019). When executing display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing, set the interrupt disabled state (Sa9017), and when the display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing is finished, set the interrupt enabled state (Sa9020). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when not being a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to be a reach when not being a big hit, The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, with the initial value random number, the initial value of the count value of the counter (normal pattern random number generation counter for determination per pattern) is determined to generate a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal pattern. Is a random number to The game control process for controlling the progress of the game to be described later (The game control microcomputer 90100 controls the game display device such as the effect display device provided in the game machine, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, etc. by itself Count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern in the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, or to control other microcomputers, the count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern is 1 round (take the random number for determination per normal pattern) When the value is advanced by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value, the initial value is set to the counter.

  When the CPU 90103 which has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 90103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 43 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a power-off detection process (S9010). Then, by executing predetermined switch processing, the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the first count switch 9023, the second count switch 9024A, and the third switch circuit 90110. Detection signals input from various switches such as count switch 9024B, fourth count switch 9024C, first general winning opening switch 9026A, second general winning opening switch 9026B, third general winning opening switch 9026C, fourth general winning opening switch 9026D The state of is determined (S9011). Subsequently, the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the first count switch 9023, the second count switch 9024A, the third count switch 9024B, and the fourth count switch 9024C via the switch circuit 90110. In order to pay out the prize balls according to detection signals inputted from various switches such as the first general winning opening switch 9026A, the second general winning opening switch 9026B, the third general winning opening switch 9026C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9026D In step S9012, the winning ball processing is executed. Thereafter, by executing predetermined main-side error processing (S9015), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, payout information and the like supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901 is output (S9016) .

  Subsequent to the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers such as the random value MR1 'and the random values MR1' to MR4 'used on the main substrate 9011 side is executed by software. (S9017). Thereafter, the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing (S9018). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation on the display unit 904B, setting of the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening on the special variable winning ball unit 907, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (S9019). The CPU 90103 executes the normal symbol process processing to control the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 9020, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable in the normal variable winning ball device 906B. Allows setting of tilting movement of winglet etc.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 90103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main substrate 9011 to a sub-side control substrate such as the effect control substrate 9012 (S9020). As an example of these, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 90105, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 9012, set the predetermined control data in the output port of the effect control INT signal and turn on the effect control INT signal for a predetermined time By setting the state to the off state or the like, transmission of effect control commands based on settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  The contents of various processes in the game control timer interrupt process will be described below.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the power failure detection process of this embodiment. In the power-off detection process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input of a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply substrate (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value (Sd 901). When the power-off signal is not input, the power-off detection process is ended. When the power-off signal is input, the backup data is specified (Sd 902), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage provided in the RAM 90102. It stores in the area (Sd 903). Then, check data used to restore the backup data is created and stored in the backup data storage area (Sd 904). Then, the process proceeds to loop processing in which no processing is performed until the pachinko gaming machine 901 is powered off. The power-off signal is continuously output when the power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value, so in the power-off detection process in this embodiment, loop processing is performed after check data is created (after execution of Sd 904). By migrating, new backup data is not stored in the backup data storage area. Therefore, for example, it is prevented that new backup data is not normally stored in the backup data storage area when the power supply voltage is further reduced while storing new backup data.

  FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the main side error processing (S9015) of this embodiment. In the main side error processing, the CPU 90103 first determines whether an abnormality informing timer indicating that abnormality notification is being performed in a predetermined period on the effect control board 9012 is in operation (S90401)

  If the abnormality notifying timer is not in operation (S90401; N), the process proceeds to S90402. If the abnormal alarming timer is operating (S90401; Y), the process proceeds to S90420, and the abnormal alarming timer is decremented by one, and whether or not the abnormal alarming timer after the subtraction has risen. It is determined (S90421).

  If the abnormality notifying timer is not up (S90421; N), the process proceeds to S90402. On the other hand, if the abnormality informing timer is up (S90421; Y), after the informing of abnormality is cleared (S90422), the process proceeds to S90402.

  In S90402, abnormality determination processing is performed to determine the occurrence of each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment exemplifies a mode for determining an error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 46, but the present invention is not limited to this, and types and numbers of these errors (abnormalities) are shown. May be appropriately set according to the model and specification of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, each error (abnormality) of 1 to 15 is set, and in the abnormality determination processing, occurrence of each error (abnormality) of these 1 to 15 can be determined. .

  As shown in FIG. 46, priorities are set to these errors (abnormalities), and in principle, errors (abnormalities) with high priorities are notified with priority.

  These errors include, for example, an error due to a short circuit abnormality of the switch power supply that supplies the power of the apparatus, such as a switch common short circuit error of priority “1”, detection of electromagnetic waves by the radio wave sensor 9070, and magnetic force by the magnetic sensor 9060. Of the device (switch) or an error such as detection error of the first count switch 9023 or the second count switch 9024A, etc. There is no possibility that the game is incorrect such as a full tank error or an out-of-ball error, but there is an error or the like that causes a problem in the progress of the game.

  Also, for each error, a condition for canceling the error that has occurred is set, and for errors with relatively high priority, "power off" is mainly taken as the cancellation condition. For an error (abnormality) having a relatively low priority, it is a cancellation condition that a predetermined time elapses or the state of the error is canceled.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46, the error (abnormality) includes an error (abnormality) controlled to the gaming stop state which is the predetermined state and an error (abnormality) not controlled to the gaming stop state which is the predetermined state. A relatively high priority error is considered as an error (abnormality) controlled to the gaming stop state, and a relatively low priority error (abnormal) is considered as an error (abnormality) not controlled to the gaming stop state .

  Note that among these errors, even if they are errors caused by the same sensor, some errors may differ depending on the time of detection. For example, as an error when abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 9080, abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 9080 at the time of operation of the first special variable winning ball device 907A or the second special variable winning ball device 907B. Is determined to be a high vibration detection 1 error with a priority of "6" and controlled to the game stop state until the power is turned off, whereas the first special variable winning ball device 907A and the second special variable winning When abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 9080 at the time of operation of the ball device 907B, it is determined that the priority is "11" and a low vibration detection 2 error, and after 60 seconds without being controlled to the gaming stop state The error is to be cleared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46, the output mode of the security signal is set for each error (abnormality), and when the occurrence of each error (abnormality) is determined, each error (abnormality) The security signal is output from the terminal board 9016 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in a mode corresponding to the above. The security signal has a relatively high priority, and an error (abnormality) for stopping the game is output until the power is turned off, whereas an error (abnormality) having a relatively low priority is output. , Or is not output at a predetermined time after the error determination. In addition, with regard to the “incorrect prize error” of priority “10”, the security signal is output not only until the power is turned off but also for a predetermined time (4 minutes in this embodiment) after the power is turned on again. Is set as.

  As described above, in the abnormality determination processing of this embodiment, the CPU 90103 is connected to the main substrate 9011, the magnetic sensor 9060, the radio wave sensor 9070, the vibration sensor 9080, the door open sensor 9090, the first winning opening door sensor 9091, the first 2 Large winning opening door sensor 9092, full tank sensor 9093, detection state of the ball out sensor 9094, the state of the payout board, detection state of the game ball of the second start opening switch 9022B, the first count switch 9023, the second count switch 9024A Each error (abnormality) shown in FIG.

  Then, after the abnormality determination processing of S90402 is performed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence of abnormality is determined in the abnormality determination processing (S90403), and the occurrence of the abnormality is not determined (S90403; N) End main side error processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred (S90403; Y), it is determined whether an abnormality informing flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed is set, that is, whether an abnormality has already been notified. It is determined whether or not (S90404).

  If the abnormality informing flag is not set (S90404; N), the process proceeds to S90410, sets the abnormality informing flag and the abnormality informing timer, and stores an error (abnormality) to start the informing, The process advances to step S90411.

  For example, if an error (abnormality) to start notification is a vibration detection 2 error, a timer value corresponding to 60 seconds is set in the abnormal notification-in-progress timer, and an error (abnormality) to start notification (starting opening) 2) If the error is an abnormal winning error, a timer value corresponding to 300 seconds is set. However, if the error (abnormality) for starting the notification is an error corresponding to the release condition of “power off”, “0” is set to the abnormality informing timer. As a result, it is determined in S90401 that the abnormal alarming timer is not in operation, so that the set abnormal alarming flag is set until the power is turned off. In other words, for errors corresponding to these "power off" cancellation conditions, the error notification is continued until the power is turned off, so the abnormality informing flag is not cleared until the power is turned off. It is supposed to be. In the case of a prize ball abnormality error where it is determined that the number of prize balls is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the game is not controlled to the game stop state, and therefore an error is notified in a state where the game is possible.

  If the abnormality informing flag is set (S90404; Y), the abnormality in informing is identified from the data of the informing abnormality stored in S90410 (S90405), and the error determined in S90402 (abnormal) It is determined whether or not is the same as the error (abnormality) during notification (S90406).

  If the error (abnormality) determined in S90402 is the same as the error (abnormality) in the notification (S90406; Y), the main side error processing ends. On the other hand, if the error (abnormality) determined in S90402 is not the same as the error (abnormality) in notification (S90406; N), the error (abnormality) determined in S90402 is higher than the error (abnormality) in notification It is determined whether the error is an error (abnormality) of the priority (S90407). If the error (abnormality) determined in S90402 is not an error (abnormality) with higher priority than an error (abnormality) during notification (S90407; N), the main side error processing ends. Therefore, when the error (abnormality) determined in S90402 is not an error (abnormality) with higher priority than an error (abnormality) during notification, the process of S90413 is executed and an error designation command is displayed on the effect control board 9012. Since no notification is sent, the notification of the error (abnormality) is not executed, and the notification of the error (abnormality) in the notification is continued.

  On the other hand, when the error (abnormality) determined in S90402 is an error (abnormality) with higher priority than the error (abnormality) during notification (S90407; Y), it further indicates the gaming stop state which is a predetermined state. It is determined whether the game stop flag is set (S90408).

  If the game stop flag is set (S90408; Y), that is, if the game is in a stop state, the main error processing ends. Therefore, when the game is stopped, the process of S90413 or the process of S90414 may be executed even if an error (abnormality) higher in priority than an error (abnormal) during notification is determined in S90402. Since there is no new error designation command sent to the effect control board 9012, the notification of the error (abnormality) during notification is continued, and the output of the security signal changes. There is no chance to turn on / off the signal.

  On the other hand, if the game stop flag is not set (S90408; N), that is, if it is not in the game stop state, the process proceeds to S90409 to reset the abnormality informing timer and reset the error in the informing (abnormal) Update and memorize. If the error (abnormality) different from the error (abnormality) during notification determined in S90402 is an error corresponding to the release condition of "power off", as in the case of S90410 described above, the error is abnormal. By setting “0” to the timer during notification, the abnormality notification flag is set until the power is turned off.

  Then, it is determined whether or not an error (abnormality) different from the error (abnormality) during notification determined in S90402 is an error corresponding to the game stop (S90411), and if it is not an error corresponding to the game stop ( In S90411; N), the process proceeds to S90413 without passing through S90412. If it is an error corresponding to the game suspension (S90411; Y), the launch control board is set to stop the launch, disabling the launch of the game ball from the hit ball launch device, and the game stop flag is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S90413 (S90412).

  In S90413, an error designating command for designating the occurrence of an error (abnormality) different from the error (abnormality) in notification determined in S90402 is set to be transmitted to the effect control board 9012 and then the error (abnormality is detected). Setting to output the security signal in the output mode corresponding to (S90414), and the main side error processing is ended. By setting to output the security signal at S90414, the security signal is output from the terminal substrate 9016 to an external device such as a hall computer in the information output process (S9016).

  The error designation command set for transmission in S90413 is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 by executing the command control process of S9020. Then, in the effect control board 9012, an error notification process (see FIG. 59) to be described later is executed, whereby an error notification corresponding to the error (abnormality) specified by the transmitted error designation command is performed. Ru.

  As described above, in the main substrate 9011 of the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment, the above-mentioned main side error processing is executed, and in the effect control substrate 9012, the error notification processing (see FIG. 59) described later is executed. Thus, as shown in FIG. 47, the execution mode of the error notification differs depending on whether the gaming state is the gaming stop state where the predetermined state is.

  Specifically, for example, when occurrence of a vibration detection 2 error shown in FIG. 46 is first determined in the playable state, occurrence of the vibration detection 2 error is as shown in FIG. 47 (A). In addition, a pop-up window of “E-54 vibration error” corresponding to the vibration detection 2 error is notified by being displayed on the effect display device 905 for 60 seconds which is a predetermined time.

  When the occurrence of the prize ball abnormality error is determined during notification of the vibration detection 2 error, the priority of the prize ball abnormality error is “7”, and the priority of the vibration detection 2 error being executed is 47, and instead of the pop-up window of “E-54 Vibration error” notifying of the vibration detection 2 error being executed, the notification of the prize ball abnormality error, specifically, FIG. As shown in A), a pop-up window including a message "Please call a staff member! E-33 Prize ball abnormality error Please turn on the power again" is displayed to notify that a prize ball abnormality error has occurred. However, in the occurrence of the prize ball abnormal error, the game is not controlled to the stopped state, and the game available state is maintained.

  Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (B), when occurrence of “Magnetic error” which is an error having higher priority than the prize ball abnormality error is determined during notification of the prize ball abnormality error, While the entire display of the effect display device 905 is displayed in black, it is indicated that the game is being stopped, and the effect display device 905 "Please call a staff member who is in the game stop! E-02 Magnet error Since the display of “Please do it” is displayed in white characters, occurrence of “Magnetic error” is notified, and also, it is notified that an error (abnormality) at which the game is stopped is a magnet error.

  Then, after the game stopped state as described above, the occurrence of the "radio wave error" is determined, which is an error having a higher priority than the "magnet error" that is triggered to be controlled to the game stopped state. In this case, as described above, since the game stop flag is set even if the occurrence of the "radio wave error" is determined, the error designation command corresponding to the determination of the "radio wave error" is not transmitted. As shown in FIG. 47 (B), these "game errors" are continued by the notification of "magnetic error" which is triggered to be controlled to the game stop state being continued without the notification of "radio wave error" being executed. It is not possible to specify what kind of error is the error triggered by the state control, and it is an error triggered by the control of these game suspension states that it is appropriate for fraud using a magnet It is possible to prevent the Do corresponding becomes impossible.

  In addition, when it is determined that the occurrence of "radio wave error" is an error that has a higher priority than the "magnet error" that is triggered to be controlled to the game stop state after entering the game stop state. As described above, since the process of S90414 is not executed, that is, the output of the security signal corresponding to the "radio wave error" whose occurrence has been determined is limited, the security signal corresponding to the "magnet error" being output Does not change (ON / OFF of the signal), and it becomes difficult to confirm an error (abnormality) that triggered the output of these security signals on the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, a hall computer etc. Can be prevented.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S9018 shown in FIG. 43 as the special symbol process process. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (S9021). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 90103 selects and executes one of the processes in S9022 to S9031 in accordance with the value of the special view process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152.

  In the start winning process of S9021, it is determined whether or not there is a first start winning or a second start winning by the first starting opening switch 9022A or the second starting opening switch 9022B, and if there is a winning, the variable display result determination The random number value MR1 'for the first time, the random number value MR2' for the big hit type determination, and the random number value MR3 'for the variation pattern determination are extracted, and in the case of the first start winning, the first special view reserve storage unit 90151A. It is stored at the top of the vacant entry, and in the case of the second start winning, it is stored at the top of the vacant entry in the second special view reservation storage unit 90151B.

  The special symbol normal processing of S9022 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol is displayed based on the presence / absence of pending data stored in the first special view pending storage unit 90151A or the second special view pending storage unit 90151B. A determination is made as to whether or not the special drawing game is to be started by the display 904B. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 'for the variable display result determination, whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the production symbol is "big hit" is the variable display result Make a decision (pre-decision) before being displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the variation display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, the finalized special symbol in the special figure game by the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B (big hit symbol or A small hit symbol, one of an off symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “1”.

  The fluctuation pattern setting processing of S9023 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of variation patterns are selected using numerical data indicating a random value MR3 'for variation pattern determination based on the result of predetermination as to whether or not the variation display result is "big hit". The process etc. which are decided on either are included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

  By the special symbol normal processing of S9022 and the fluctuation pattern setting processing of S9023, the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation display time of the finalized special symbol, the special symbol and the effect symbol as the fluctuation display result of the special symbol is determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing are performed using the random symbol value MR1 'for determining the variation display result, the random number value MR2' for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 'for the variation pattern determination. It includes the process of determining the variation display mode of the effect pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of S9024 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation processing, processing for setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol indicator 904B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of S9024 is executed, the special figure variation timer value which is the storage value in the special figure variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 90153 is decremented by 1 or added to the first Whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure in the special symbol display 904A or a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 904B, it is progressed by a common timer A measurement of time is taken. Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Thus, the special symbol variation process of S9024 is the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol indicator 904A, and the second special figure in the second special symbol indicator 904B. It is sufficient that the process of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special drawing game using the symbol is controlled by the common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of S9025 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and the finalized special symbol as the variation display result of the special symbol is stopped (displayed) It includes the process of making settings for Then, it is determined whether the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is on or not, and when the big hit flag is on, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". Be done. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is off, it is further determined whether the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is on or not, and the small hit flag is on. In this case, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "7". When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of S9026 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “4”. In this big hit opening pre-processing, on the basis of the fluctuation indication result becoming “big hit”, etc., the process to start the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and set for opening the first big winning opening Etc. are included. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the first big winning opening is opened is set according to whether the big hit type is "big hit A", "big hit B", or "big hit C". It is also good. As an example, regardless of the type of big hit, while setting the upper limit of the period which makes the 1st big winning a prize opening state to “29 seconds”, the opening frequency of the 1st big winning a prize opening which becomes the upper limit frequency which executes the round, The setting of jackpot status is performed by setting “5 times” for “big hit A”, “10 times” for “big hit B”, and “15 times” for “big hit C”. Just do it. At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing of S9027 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the first big winning opening, the measured elapsed time, the number of gaming balls detected by the first count switch 9023, etc. The process includes determining whether it is time to return the first big winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the first large winning opening to the closed state, the processing of stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the first large winning opening door 90701 etc. is executed, and then the value of the special view process flag is “6 Is updated to

  The big hit end processing of S9028 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which ending effect is performed as a rendering operation to notify the end of the big hit gaming state by a rendering device such as the rendering display device 905, the speakers 908L, 908R, the gaming effect LED 909, etc. Processing for waiting until the passage of time has elapsed, and processing for performing various settings (setting of time saving flag) for starting time saving control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0".

  Specifically, in the big hit end process, the type of the big hit that has been executed is specified. Then, if the specified jackpot type is “big hit A”, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0” without setting the time saving flag. When the identified big hit type is "big hit B", the time-shortening flag is set and the initial count value ("20" in this embodiment) corresponding to "big hit B" is set in the time reduced number counter and the special figure process Update the flag value to "0". If the specified jackpot type is "big hit C", the time-shortening flag is set, and the count initial value ("100" in this embodiment) corresponding to "big hit C" is set in the time reduction counter. Update the figure process flag value to "0".

  The small hit opening pre-processing of S9029 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this small hit opening pre-processing, setting to start the execution of the round in the small hit gaming state and open the second big winning opening based on the variable display result becoming “small hit” etc. Processing etc. are included. At this time, based on, for example, the variable display result being "small hit", the upper limit of the period during which the second large winning opening is opened is set to "one second", and the upper limit number of times to execute the round The setting of the small hit state may be performed by setting the opening number of the second large winning opening to "one time". At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "8".

  In this example, in the small hit state, the number of opening times of the second large winning opening is set to “one time”, and the upper limit of the period for opening the second large winning opening is set to “1 second”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of opening times of the second large winning opening in the small hitting state may be two or more times, and the second large winning opening is opened. The upper limit of the period to be in the state may be a period other than “1 second” as long as the game ball can win a prize at the second large winning opening.

  The small hit open processing of S9030 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "8". This small hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the second big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the second count switch 9024A, etc. And a process of determining whether it is time to return the second big winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the second big winning opening to the closed state, the processing of stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9083 for the second big winning opening door 90711 etc. is executed, and the value of the special processing process flag is "9 Is updated to

  The small hitting end processing of S9031 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "9". In this small hitting end process, waiting corresponding to a period in which ending effect is executed as a rendering operation to notify the end of the big hit gaming state by a rendering device such as the rendering display device 905, the speakers 908L, 908R, the gaming effect LED 909, etc. It includes processing to wait until the time passes. When such setting is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0".

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S9022 of FIG. 48 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 49, the CPU 90103 first determines whether the number of second special view reservations is “0” (S90141). The second special view reservation storage count is the number of reserved storages of the special view game using the second special view by the second special symbol display 904B. For example, in the process of S90141, the second hold storage count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 90154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether the read value is “0”.

  When the number of second special figure holding memories is other than "0" at S90141 (S90141; N), it is stored as holding data stored corresponding to holding number "1" in second special drawing holding storage unit 90151B. Then, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 'for special view display result determination, the random number value MR2' for big hit type determination, and the random value MR3 'for variation pattern determination are read out respectively (S90142). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of S90142, the second special view pending storage count and the total pending storage count are decremented by 1, for example, by subtracting the second special view pending storage count count value or the total pending storage count count value and updating it. As well as updating the data of the second special view reservation storage unit 90151B. More specifically, random number values MR1 'to MR3 stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 90151B in entries lower than holding number "1" (for example, entries corresponding to holding numbers "2" to "4"). The pending data indicating 'is shifted upward by one entry (S90143).

  Thereafter, the fluctuation special drawing designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special drawing designation buffer is updated to “2” (S90144), and then the flow shifts to S90149.

  On the other hand, when the number of second Tokushu storages is "0" at S90141 (S90141; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of first special maps storage is "0" (S90145). The first special view reservation storage count is the number of suspension storages of the special view game using the first special view by the first special symbol display 904A. For example, in the process of S90145, the game control counter setting unit 90154 reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage count counter and determines whether the read value is “0”. Good. As described above, the process of S90145 is executed when it is determined in S90141 that the number of second special view reservations is “0”, and the number of first special views suspension storage is “0”. Determine if As a result, the special view game using the second special view starts being executed with priority over the special view game using the first special view.

  In addition, the special drawing game using the second special drawing is not limited to the one to be executed prior to the special drawing game using the first special drawing, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and from the stored data, the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started. It is good if you can decide

  When it is determined in S90145 that the number of first special view reservations is other than "0" (S90145; N), it is assumed that the first special view suspension storage unit 90151A stores the suspension data corresponding to the suspension number "1". Then, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 'for the special view display result determination, the random number value MR2' for the big hit type determination, and the random number value MR3 'for the variation pattern determination are read out (S90146). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of S90146, the first special view pending storage count and the total pending storage count are decremented by 1, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first special view pending storage count and the total pending storage count As well as updating the data of the first special image storage section 90151A. More specifically, random number values MR1 'to MR3 stored in entries under the holding number "1" (for example, entries corresponding to holding numbers "2" to "4") in first special view holding storage unit 90151A. The pending data indicating 'is shifted upward by one entry (S90147).

  Thereafter, the variable special drawing designation buffer value which is the storage value of the variable special drawing designation buffer is updated to “1” (S90148), and then the process proceeds to S90149.

  In S90149, a special table display result which is a variation display result of a special symbol is shown in FIG. 39 (A) as a use table for determining which of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “off”. Select and set the display result judgment table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 'for determining the special image display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is assigned to the respective special image display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "off". In comparison with the determination value, it is determined whether the special figure display result is to be "big hit", "small hit", or "off" (S90150).

  After the special view display result is determined in S90150, it is determined whether the special view display result is a "big hit" (S90151). When it is determined that the "big hit" (S90151; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is set to the on state (S90152). At this time, a jackpot type determination table corresponding to the variation special-designated buffer is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as any of a plurality of types (S90153). At this time, if the value of the variation special view designation buffer is “1”, the CPU 90103 selects and sets the big hit type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 39B, and specifies the variation special figure When the value of the buffer is “2”, the jackpot classification determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 39C may be selected and set. By referring to the jackpot type judgment table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 'for jackpot type judgment stored in the random number buffer for variation is "big hit A", "big hit B" in the big hit type judgment table. In accordance with which of the determination values assigned to each of the "big hit C" and "big hit C" matches, it is determined which of a plurality of types of big hit type to be (S90154).

  By determining the jackpot type in the process of S90154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, either time-saving state when time single-out control (time-saving control) is performed, or normal state when time-saving control is not performed Whether to control to the game state is determined before the finalized special symbol as the variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 (S90155), the jackpot type determined It memorizes, it advances to S90156. As an example, if the big hit type is “big hit A”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “0”, if “big hit B”, “1”, and if “big hit C”, “2” may be set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the "big hit" is not made at S90151 (S90151; N), the CPU 90103 determines whether the special view display result is a "small hit" (S90151a). If it is determined to be "small hit" (S90151a; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is set to the on state (S90151b). At this time, a small hit type determination table (see FIG. 39D) is selected and set as a use table for determining the small hit type as any of a plurality of types (S90151 c). By referring to the small hit type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 ′ for hit type determination stored in the random number buffer for variation is “small hit A” in the small hit type determination table, Depending on which of the determination values assigned to each small hit type of “small hit B”, the small hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (S90151 d).

  Corresponding to the small hit type determined in this way, for example, by setting the small hit type buffer value which is the storage value of the small hit type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 (S90151 e), it is determined The small hit type is stored, and the process proceeds to S90156. As an example, the small hit type buffer value may be set to “0” if the small hit type is “small hit A”, and may be set to “1” if “small hit B”.

  In S90156, as a result of prior determination of whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state (whether the big hit flag is set), as a result of the determination of the big hit type in the case of the big hit gaming state, further, to the small hit gaming state In accordance with the result of the predetermination as to whether or not to control (whether or not the small hit flag is set), the finalized special symbol is set. As an example, a special symbol indicating a symbol of "-" which becomes an out symbol is set as a finalized special symbol corresponding to a preliminary determination result indicating that the special image display result is "off". In addition, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" in S90151, according to the determination result of the big hit type in S90154, it becomes the big hit symbol of "3", "5", "7" Set one of the special symbols that show numbers to the finalized special symbol. That is, the special symbol indicating the number of "3" is set as the determined special symbol according to the determination result that the big hit type is "big hit A". Moreover, according to the determination result which makes a big hit classification "big hit B", the special symbol which shows the number of "5" is set as a confirmation special symbol. A special symbol indicating the number “7” is set as the finalized special symbol according to the determination result that the big hit type is “big hit C”. In addition, in response to the pre-decision result indicating that the special figure display result is "small hit", a special symbol indicating the symbol "2" to be a small hit symbol is set as the determined special symbol.

  After setting the finalized special symbol in S90156, the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting processing (S90157), and the special symbol normal processing is ended.

  If the number of reserved memories of the special drawing game using the first special drawing at S90145 is "0" (S90145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (S90158), the special symbol is usually selected. End the process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (waiting customer demonstration specification command) for specifying a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image or the like on the effect display device 905 is effect control from the main substrate 9011 It is determined whether transmission to the substrate 9012 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo specification command has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S9025 of FIG. 48 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 90103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process of S9032 to end the variation of the special symbol, and stops at the first special symbol indicator 904A or the second special symbol indicator 904B. Control for deriving and displaying a symbol is performed (S90181). In addition, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1” indicating the first special figure, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 904A is ended, and the variation special figure designation buffer value is In the case of "2" indicating the second special figure, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 904B is ended. Further, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 9012 (S90182). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (S90183), and when the big hit flag is not set (S90183; N), the process proceeds to S90189a.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is set (S90183; Y), the CPU 90103 clears the short time flag if the short time flag is set (S90184), and the big hit stored in the effect control board 9012 Depending on the type, settings are made to transmit a hit start 1 designated command (big hit A), a hit start 2 assigned command (big hit B), and a hit start 3 assigned command (big hit C) (S90185). The hit start designation command set in S90185 is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 in the above-described command control process (S9017).

  Further, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a game state designating command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 9012 (S90186).

  Then, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 905) is set in the big hit display time timer (S90187). Further, the number of opening times (for example, 5 times in the case of big hit A, 10 times in case of big hit B, and 15 times in case of big hit C) is set in the special winning opening open frequency counter (S90188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (S9026) (S90189), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

  On the other hand, in S90189a, the CPU 90103 determines whether the small hit flag is set (S90189a). If the small hit flag is not set (S90189a; Y), the process proceeds to S90190. On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (S90189a; Y), the CPU 90103 hits the start 4 designated command (small hit A) according to the small hit type stored in the effect control board 9012. The setting for transmitting the start 5 designation command (small hit B) is performed (S90189 b). The hit start designation command set in S90189 b is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 in the command control process (S9017) described above.

  Then, the small hit display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 905) (S90189 c). In addition, the number of opening (for example, once in the case of a small hit) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (S90189 d). Further, the value of the time reduction number counter is decremented by 1 (S90189 e), and it is determined whether the value of the time reduction number counter becomes 0 (S90189 f). If the value of the time saving counter is 0 (S90189g; Y), the time saving flag is cleared and the process proceeds to S90189 h (S90189g). If the value of the time saving counter is not 0 (S90189g; N) , S90189g is not performed, it progresses to S90189 h.

  Then, the CPU 90103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "7" which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S9026) (S90189 h), and ends the special symbol stop process.

  On the other hand, in S90190, the CPU 90103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is "0". If the value of the time saving number counter is “0” (S90190; Y), the process proceeds to S90198.

  On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (S90190; N), that is, if it is a high base state (time reduction state) in which time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1. (S90191). Then, it is judged whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (S90193). If it is not "0" (S90193; N), the process proceeds to S90198, and the value of the time reduction counter is "0." (S90193; Y), the game state corresponding to the set state of the time saving flag (specifically, the low base state (normally, normal state) after clearing the time short flag to end time saving control (S90193) The transmission setting of the game state designation command corresponding to the state) is performed (S90195). Then, the CPU 90103 performs transmission setting of the right-handed notification LED extinguishing designation command (S90196), turns off the right-handed display unit 9025D, and proceeds to S90198 (S90199). Note that the command for turning off the LED for right-handed notification set in S90196 is sent to the effect control board 9012 by executing the command control process (S9020).

  Then, the CPU 90103 updates the value of the special view process flag to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing in S90198, and then ends the special symbol stop processing.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S9026 of FIG. 48 as the big hit opening pre-processing. In the big hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the right turn notification LED lighting specification command transmitted flag indicating that the transmission setting of the right lighting notification LED lighting specification command has already been executed (S90301) ). When the flag for indicating that the right-handed LED lighting is transmitted has not been set (S90301; N), the right-handed LED lighting specification command transmission setting is performed (S90302), and the right-handed display unit is lighted (S90303). ). Then, the flag for indicating that the right-handed LED lighting is transmitted has been set, and the process proceeds to S90305 (S90304). Note that the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command set for transmission in S90302 is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 by executing the command control process (S9020). When the flag for indicating that the right-handed LED lighting is transmitted has been set (S90301; Y), the process proceeds to S90305 without executing S90302 to S90304.

  In S90305, the CPU 90103 decrements the big hit display time timer by one. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit display time timer has timed out (S90306). If the big hit display time timer has timed out (S90306; Y), the right-handed LED lighting designation command transmitted flag is cleared (S90307), and the open time timer is set (S90308). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value according to the big hit open processing, and the big hit open pre-processing is ended (S90309). If the big hit display time timer has not timed out (S90306; N), the big hit opening pre-processing is ended without executing S90307 to S90309.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S9028 of FIG. 48 as the big hit end process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 90103 determines whether the big hit end display timer is in operation (S90311). When the big hit end display timer is not in operation (S90311; N), the big hit end display timer, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 905 (big hit end display time) It sets (S90312) and ends big hit end processing.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end display timer is operating (S90311; Y), the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (S90313). Then, the CPU 90103 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (S90314). If it has not ended, the big hit end processing ends. If the big hit end display time has elapsed (S90314; Y), the CPU 90103 determines whether the stored big hit type is big hit A or big hit D (S90315).

  When the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot D (S90315; Y), the transmission setting of the right-handed LED turn-off designation command is performed (S90316a), the right-handed display part is turned off, and the process proceeds to S90319 (S90316b ). Note that the command for turning off the right-handed LED, which is set to be transmitted in S90316a, is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 by executing the command control process (S9020). If the big hit type is any of big hit B, big hit C, and big hit E (S90315; N), the CPU 90103 sets the short time flag (S90317) and sets "100" in the short time counter (S90318) ), Go to S90319.

  In S90319, the CPU 90103 clears the big hit flag, and performs transmission setting of a big hit end designation command according to the big hit type (S90320). Then, after performing the transmission setting of the game state specification command for notifying the effect control board 9012 of the game state based on the set probability change flag and the short time flag (S90321), the special figure process flag is processed as a special symbol normal processing The value is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to (S90322). The jackpot end designation command transmitted and set in S90320 and the gaming state designation command transmitted and set in S90321 are transmitted to the effect control board 9012 by executing the command control process (S9020).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S9029 of FIG. 48 as the small hit start pre-processing. In the small hit start pre-processing, the CPU 90103 first decrements the small hit display time timer by 1 (S90201), and determines whether the small hit display time timer has timed out (S90202). When the small hit display time timer has not timed out (S90202; N), the small hit open pre-processing is ended, while when the small hit display time timer has timed out (S90202; Y), the second big winning game A value corresponding to a predetermined period (for example, one second) is set in an open time timer for opening the mouth (S90203). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" which is a value corresponding to the small hit open processing (S9030) (S90204), and the small hit open pre-processing is ended.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S9030 in FIG. 48 as small hit open processing. In small hit open processing, the CPU 90103 first decrements the value of the open time timer by 1 ( S90211). Then, the CPU 90103 determines whether the open time timer has timed out (S90212).

  If the open time timer has timed out (S90212; Y), the process proceeds to S90230, and if the open time timer has not timed out (S90212; N), whether or not it is the opening timing of the second big winning opening It is determined (S90213). When it is the opening timing of the second large winning opening, the CPU 90103 controls the second large winning opening to an open state by driving the solenoid 9083 for the second large winning opening door 90711 (S90214). Then, transmission setting of the special winning opening open designation command corresponding to the round is performed (S90215), and the process proceeds to S90216. Note that the special winning opening open designation command for which transmission setting has been performed in S90215 is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 in the command control process (S9020) described above. If it is not the opening timing of the second large winning opening (S90213; N), it proceeds to S90216 without passing through S90214 and S90215.

  In S90216, the CPU 90103 determines whether it is the closing timing of the second big winning opening (S90216). If it is the closing timing of the second large winning opening (S90216; Y), the CPU 90103 controls the second large winning opening to the closed state by driving the solenoid 9083 for the second large winning opening door 90711 (S90217) . Then, the transmission setting of the designated command after opening the special winning opening corresponding to the round is performed (S90218), and the process proceeds to S90223. Note that the special winning opening open designation command for which transmission setting has been performed in S90218 is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 in the command control process (S9020) described above. If it is not the closing timing of the second big winning opening (S90216; N), it proceeds to S90223 without passing through S90217 and S90218.

  In S90223, the CPU 90103 determines whether the third count switch 9024B is turned on (S90223). When the third count switch 9024B is not turned on (S90223; N), the small hit open processing is ended, and when the third count switch 9024B is turned on (S90223; Y), the third count switch 9024B is already performed. It is determined whether the V winning flag indicating that the count switch 9024B has been turned on, that is, that the gaming ball has passed the third count switch, is set (S90224). If the V prize flag is set (S90224; Y), the small hitting open processing is ended, and if the V prize flag is not set (S90224; N), the V prize flag is set (S90225) .

  Then, the CPU 90103 performs transmission setting of the V prize notification command to the effect control board 9012 (S90227). The V prize notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 in the command control process (S9020) described above. In addition, if the second large winning opening is in the open state, the CPU 90103 controls the second large winning opening to the closed state by driving the solenoid 9083 for the second large winning opening door 90711 (S90228), and the opening time is The timer is cleared (S90229).

  Then, in S90230, the CPU 90103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "9" which is a value corresponding to the small hitting end process (S9031) (S90230), and ends the small hit open processing.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S9031 of FIG. 48 as the small hit end process. In the small hit end process, whether or not the small hit end display timer is operating in the CPU 90103 Is determined (S90231). If the small hit end display timer is not in operation (S90231; N), the small hit flag is cleared (S90232), and transmission setting of the hit end designation command according to the small hit to the effect control board 9012 is performed (S90233) ). The hit end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 in the command control process (S9020) described above. Then, a value corresponding to the small hit end display time is set in the small hit end display timer (S90234), and the small hit end process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the small hit end display timer is in operation (S90231; Y), the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (S90235). Then, it is determined whether the small hit end display time has elapsed, that is, whether the small hit end display timer has timed out (S90236). If the small hit end display time has not elapsed (S90236; N), the CPU 90103 determines whether the third count switch 9024B is turned on (S90237). If the third count switch 9024B is not turned on (S90237; N), the small hit end processing is ended, and if the third count switch 9024B is turned on (S90237; Y), the third count is already performed. It is determined whether the V winning flag indicating that the switch 9024B has been turned on, that is, the game ball has passed the third count switch, is set (S90238). If the V prize flag is set (S90238; Y), the small hitting end processing is ended, and if the V prize flag is not set (S90238; N), the V prize flag is set (S90239).

  Then, the CPU 90103 performs transmission setting of the V prize notification command to the effect control board 9012 (S90241), and ends the small hitting end process. The V prize notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 in the command control process (S9020) described above.

  If the small hit end display time has elapsed in S90236 (S90236; Y), the CPU 90103 determines whether the V winning flag is set (S90242). If the V prize flag is set (S90242; Y), the CPU 90103 clears the V prize flag and sets the big hit flag (S90243, S90244). Then, the CPU 90103 determines the big hit type from the “big hit D” and the “big hit E” based on the small hit type in which the V winning is generated (S90246). As the big hit type, as shown in FIG. 39D, when the small hit type in which the V prize is generated is “small hit A”, the big hit type is determined as “big hit D”, and the V winning type concerned If the type of small hit that occurred is "small hit B", the type of big hit is determined to be "big hit E". Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 (S90247), the jackpot type determined It memorizes, it advances to S90248. As an example, if the big hit type is "big hit D", the big hit type buffer value may be "3", and if "big hit E", it may be "4".

  After execution of S90247, the CPU 90103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (S9026) (S90248), and ends the small hit end processing.

  That is, in this embodiment, the game ball passes the third count switch 9024B not only during the small hit game but also during the period until the small hit end display time after the small hit game ends. Even if the game ball wins the second big winning opening just before the end of the small hit game, the game ball passes the third count switch 9024B and the big hit game is executed after the end of the small hit end processing It has become so.

  If the V prize flag is not set in S90242 (S90242; N), the CPU 90103 determines whether the time saving flag is set (S90249). If the time saving flag is set, the process proceeds to S90253. If the time saving flag is not set, the transmission setting of the game state designating command indicating the normal state is performed (S90250), and the LED for turning off right indication turning off is transmitted. The setting is performed (S90251). Note that the gaming state designation command and the right-handed LED turn-off designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 9012 in the command control process (S9020) described above. In addition, the CPU 90103 turns off the right-handed display unit 9025D and proceeds to S90253.

  Then, the CPU 90103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S9022) in S90253, and ends the small hitting end processing.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the CPU 90103 executes each processing in the special symbol process processing to operate the game ball by operating the bat operating handle in the short time state, the small hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state, etc. In the gaming state to launch (to the right) to strike 9010R, the right strike display area 9025D lights up, and the game ball is launched to the left gaming area 9010L by the operation of the bat operating handle (does to strike the left) in a normal condition The right-handed display unit 9025D is turned off.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control (S9051) ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S9052). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, if the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 90120 clears the flag (S9053), and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 90120 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs processing such as setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis processing: S9054). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90120 checks the content of the command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 90122. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 36) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs effect control process processing (S9055). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 905.

  Next, the effect random number updating process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the effect random number such as the jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (S9056). Then, after error notification processing (S9057) shown in FIG. 59 and power failure recovery screen display processing (S9059) shown in FIG. 60 are executed, the processing proceeds to S9052.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (S9055) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process, first, the effect control CPU 90120 launches a game ball such as a short game state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, etc. toward the right game area 9010 R (does right) in the game state If there is a right-handed notification process (S9071) to notify the player that the game is in the gaming state where the player is hit-right by displaying on the effect display device 905 or lighting the right-handed notification LED 9030, and the effect display device 905 The suspension display updating process (S9072) of updating the suspension storage display in the first suspension storage display area 905D and the second suspension storage display area 905U to the display according to the storage content of the effect control buffer setting unit is executed.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 performs one of the processes in S9073 to S9082 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed.

  Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073): It is confirmed whether a fluctuation pattern designation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 90100 or not. Specifically, it is checked in the command analysis process whether or not the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received. If the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (S9074).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start process (S9074): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (S9075).

  Process during effect symbol variation (S9075): Control the switching timing and the like of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern, and monitor the end of the variation time. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S9076).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop process (S9076): Based on the fact that the effect control command (pattern decision command) instructing all symbol stop is received, the fluctuation of the effect pattern is stopped and the control to derive and display the display result (stop pattern) Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S9077), the small hit display process (S9080) or the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073).

  Big hit display process (S9077): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for reporting the occurrence of a big hit on the effect display device 905. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game (S9078).

  During the big hit game processing (S9078): Control during the big hit game. For example, when a special winning opening open designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 905, display control of big hit gaming effect, sound output control, etc. are performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect processing (S9079).

  Big hit end effect processing (S9079): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073).

  Small hit display process (S9080): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of a small hit on the effect display device 905. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit game in process (S9081).

  Small hit in game processing (S9081): Control of small hit in game. For example, when a special winning opening open designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 905 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting end effect process (S9082).

  Small hitting end effect processing (S9082): In the effect display device 905, display control is performed to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073) or the big hit display process (S9077).

  In this embodiment, when the supply of power is resumed after the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, only the effect control board 9012 is unstable in operation, including the release of the game ball. The game itself can continue. Therefore, in particular, it is possible to control the big hit gaming state by executing the variable display as in this embodiment, and the game ball passes the specific area (the third count switch 9024B in this embodiment) during the small hit game. A big hit game end based on the pachinko game machine of the type that can be controlled to the big hit game state based on what was played (the so-called 1 type 2 type pachinko game machine) or that the game ball passed a specific area during the big hit game In pachinko gaming machines in which probability variation control is implemented later, the game display is launched on the right game area 9010 R for the player by displaying a right-handed notification image on the effect display device 905 together with the power failure recovery screen. If not prompting, the game ball loses the opportunity to pass through the specific area, causing a disadvantage for the player. In addition, even in the game arcade clerk or the like, when the power failure recovery screen is displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 901, the game ball is stopped from being fired until the display of the power failure recovery screen is ended for the player. There may be a case where the game store side may not be able to appropriately take action when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed. From such a reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment, the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 was resumed by executing the right-handed notification processing and the power failure recovery screen display processing described below. In this case, the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can be reduced.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the right-handed notification process (S9071) of this embodiment. In the right-handed notification process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the right-handed notification image is being displayed in the second mode on the effect display device 905 (S90701). In addition, the right-handed notification image is displayed to face the right game area 9010R in the upper right part of the effect display device 905 in order to notify that it is in a time-saving state, a big hit game, or a small hit game. It is an image of an arrow. Moreover, as a display mode of the right-handed notification image in this embodiment, the first mode and the second mode described above can be displayed by the effect display device 905, and the second mode is more than the first mode. Is an aspect that displays an image of a large right-pointing arrow.

  If the right-handed notification image is being displayed in the second mode (S90701; Y), the process proceeds to S90713, and the right-handed notification image is being displayed in the first manner or the right-handed notification image is not displayed (S90701; N) further determines whether the right-handed notification image is being displayed in the first mode (S90702). If the right-handed notification image is being displayed in the first mode (S 90702; Y), the process proceeds to S 9010 and if the right-handed notification image is not being displayed in the first manner, that is, the right-handed notification image is not displayed In the case (S90702; N), the process proceeds to S90703.

  In S90703, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not there is reception of a power supply recovery designation command. If the power recovery specification command is received (S90703; Y), the process proceeds to S90707, and if the power recovery specification command is not received (S90703; N), the right-handed LED lighting specification command is further received It is determined whether or not (S90704). If there is no reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command (S90704; N), the right-handed notification processing ends, and if there is reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command (S90704; Y), for effect control The CPU 90120 controls the LED control board 9014 to start lighting of the right-handed notification LED 9030 (S90705). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the display of the right-handed notification image in the first mode in the upper right portion of the effect display device 905 (S90706), and ends the right-handed notification process.

  Further, at S90707, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not there is reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command. If there is no reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command (S90707; N), the right-handed notification processing ends, and if there is reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command (S90707; Y), for effect control The CPU 90120 controls the LED control board 9014 to start lighting of the right-handed notification LED 9030 (S90708). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the display of the right-handed notification image in the second mode in the upper right portion of the effect display device 905 (S90709), and ends the right-handed notification process.

  In addition, in S90710, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not there is reception of the LED-off indication command for right-handed notification. If there is no reception of the right-handed notification LED turn-off designation command (S90710; N), the right-handed notification processing is ended, and if there is reception of the right-handed notification LED turn-off designation command (S90710; Y), for effect control The CPU 90120 turns off the right-handed notification LED 9030 by controlling the LED control board 9014 (S90711). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 ends the display of the right-handed notification image in the upper right portion of the effect display device 905 (S90712), and ends the right-handed notification process.

  Further, in S90713, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not any of the symbol determination command, the special winning opening open designated command, and the hit end designated command has been received. If there is reception of any of the symbol determination command, the special winning opening open designated command, and the hit end designated command (S90713; Y), the processing of S90711 and S90712 (right turn off notification LED 9030 and right turn off notification image Execute display end) to end the right-handed notification process, and when there is no reception of any of the symbol confirmation command, the big winning opening open designated command, and the hit end designated command (S90713; N), S90711 and S90712 The right-handed notification process is ended without executing the process of.

  That is, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the gaming state (time reduction state, big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state) in which the gaming state strikes the gaming ball toward the right gaming area 9010R during the game, the CPU 90120 for effect control The right-handed notification LED 9030 is turned on, and the right-handed notification image is displayed in the first mode in the upper right portion of the effect display device 905. Then, when the gaming state is controlled to the gaming state (normal state) in which the gaming ball is launched toward the left gaming area 9010L, the effect control CPU 90120 turns off the right hitting notification LED 9030 and the right in the first mode. The display of the hit notification image is ended.

  In addition, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped (the power is turned off) due to the occurrence of an error such as radio wave error, magnet error, vibration detection error or the like mentioned above during the game. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed (the power is turned on) again without operating the game machine, the gaming state at the time of stopping the supply of the power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is right If it is a gaming state (time reduction state, big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state) to launch to the area 9010 R, while turning on the LED 9030 for right-handed notification, turn off the right power failure recovery screen in the effect display device 905 Display in the form. Then, the symbol determination command, the big winning opening open designated command, the hit ending designated command reception, that is, the fluctuation stop of the special symbol, the closing of the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening, the big hit gaming state or the small hitting game When shifting from the state to the short time state, the effect control CPU 90120 turns off the right-handed notification LED 9030 and ends the display of the right-handed notification image in the second mode.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 43, 50, 52, 55 and 58, in this embodiment, the CPU 90103 periodically performs command control processing in the game control timer interrupt processing every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). (S9020) is executed and the CPU90103 is linked to the right turn on display unit 9025D being turned on by directing the right turn notification LED lighting specification command and the right turn notification LED turn off specification command to the effect control board 9012 Then, it is possible that the effect control CPU 90120 turns on the right notification LED 9030 and the effect control CPU 90120 turns off the right notification LED 9030 in conjunction with the CPU 90103 turning off the right display portion 9025D. Therefore, even if the player does not visually recognize the right-handed display portion 9025D, the gaming state strikes the gaming ball toward the right gaming area 9010R by visually recognizing the right-handed notification LED 9030, a short state, a big hit gaming state, small It is possible to determine whether or not it is a hit gaming state.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an error notification process (S9057) of this embodiment. In the error notification process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether the error notification timer is in operation (S90501).

  If the error informing timer is not in operation, that is, if the error informing is not performed, the process proceeds to S9052.

  On the other hand, if the error informing timer is in operation, that is, if the error informing is being executed, after the error informing timer is decremented by one (S90510), the error informing timer after timer subtraction is up. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S90511).

  If the timer is not up during error notification (S90511; N), the process proceeds to S9052 without passing through S90512 and S90513.

  On the other hand, if the error notification in-process timer is up (S90511; Y), the error notification in-progress flag is cleared (S90512), and the error notification in progress is ended (S90513), and the process proceeds to S90502.

  In S90502, it is determined whether the error designation command reception flag is set. The error designation command reception flag is set in the command analysis processing when the command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 is identified as the error designation command in the command analysis processing (S9054) described above.

  If the error designation command reception flag is not set (S90502; N), the error notification process is ended. On the other hand, when the error designation command reception flag is set (S90502; Y), the set error designation command reception flag is cleared (S90503), and the error designation command stored in the error designation command storage area is The error type is specified from (specifically, the value of EXT) (S90504), the notification mode set for the specified error type, specifically, the contents to be displayed on the effect display device 905, and the game effect The lighting mode of the LED 909 and the voice to be output are specified (S90505), and the error notification is started in the specified notification mode (S90506).

  Then, the error type specified in S90504 is an error having a notification period, for example, a vibration detection 2 error in which 60 seconds is set as a release period (notification period), or 300 seconds as a release period (notification period) It is determined whether or not there is a starting opening 2 abnormal winning error or the like.

  If the error type is an error having a notification period (S90507; Y), the error notification flag is set together with a value corresponding to the notification period in the error notification informing timer and the timer notification timer timer count is started. The error notification process ends. As a result, the notification of the error started in S90506 ends when the timer in the error notification is up.

  On the other hand, if the error type is not an error having a notification period (S90507; N), only the error notification in progress flag is set, and the error notification processing is ended without starting the timer count of the error notification in progress timer. As a result, since the timer informing error notification is not determined to be in operation in S90501 described above, the notification of the error started in S90506 is continued until the next error designation command is received.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the power failure recovery screen display process (S9059) of this embodiment. In the power failure recovery screen display process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether the recovery screen display process timer described later is in operation, that is, whether the power failure recovery screen is being displayed in the performance display device 905 or not. It is determined whether or not (S90611). If the recovery screen display process timer is in operation (S90611; Y), the process proceeds to S90618, and if the recovery screen display process timer is not in operation (S90611; N), whether or not the power failure recovery designation command is received Is determined (S90612). When the power failure recovery designation command is not received (S90612; N), the power failure recovery screen display process is ended, and when the power failure recovery designation command is received (S90612; Y), further, for right-handed notification It is determined whether the LED lighting designation command has been received (S90613).

  If there is no reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command (S90613; N), a power failure recovery screen (power left-off notification to notify the game ball to be launched toward the left gaming area 9010L in the effect display device 905 Proceed to S90616 (S90614), when there is reception of the LED lighting specification command for right-handed notification (S90613; Y), the effect display device Select the right-handed recovery screen display process table for displaying a power failure recovery screen (right-handed power failure recovery screen) to notify the game ball to launch toward the right gaming area 9010R in 905, and proceed to S90616 (S90615).

  Then, in S90615, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the process timer in the recovery screen display process data 1 of the recovery screen display process table selected in S90614 or S90615. In the recovery screen display process table selected in S90614 or S90615, display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 905, and sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with the respective recovery screen display process data n (1 to N).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 follows the contents of the recovery screen display process data 1 (display control execution data 1 and sound control execution data 1 etc.) to the effect device (effect component as a effect component, effect display device 905 as a component, effect as a component The control of the speakers 908 L, 908 R, etc., which are the parts for control parts, is executed, and the display of the power failure recovery screen is started (S90617). For example, in order to display the power failure recovery screen corresponding to the recovery screen display process table selected in S90614 or S90615 in the effect display device 905, an instruction is output to the display control unit 90123. Further, in order to perform audio output from the speakers 908 L and 908 R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 9013. Then, the power failure recovery screen display process ends.

  On the other hand, at S90618, the effect control CPU 90120 decrements the value of the recovery screen display process timer by one. Then, it is determined whether the recovery screen display process timer has timed out (S90619). When the recovery screen display process timer has timed out (S90619; Y), the recovery screen display process data is switched (S90620). That is, the recovery screen display process timer is newly started by setting the process timer set value set next in the recovery screen display process table in the recovery screen display process timer (S90621). In addition, the control state of the rendering device (component for presentation) is changed based on the display control execution data, the sound control execution data, etc. set next to the display control execution data (S90622). Then, the process proceeds to step S90624.

  On the other hand, when the recovery screen display process timer has not timed out (S90619; N), effects are produced according to the contents (display control execution data, sound control execution data, etc.) of recovery screen display process data corresponding to the recovery screen display process timer. The control of the apparatus (component for presentation) is executed (S90623), and the process proceeds to S90624.

  Then, in step S90624, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the special winning opening open designation command has been received. When there is reception of the special winning opening open designation command (S90624; Y), in addition to the power failure recovery screen being displayed on the effect display device 905, the effect display device 905 in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state The display of the notification image during the opening of the special winning opening for notifying that the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening is open is started, and the process proceeds to S90629. If the special winning opening open designation command has not been received (S90624; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening opening notification image is being displayed (S90626). If the special winning opening open notification image is not being displayed (S90626; N), the processing proceeds to S90629, and if the special winning opening opening notification image is being displayed (S90626; Y), the special winning opening after the release of the designated command It is determined whether or not there is reception, that is, it is determined whether the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is closed in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state (S90627). If there is no reception of the designated command after releasing the special winning opening (S90627; N), the power failure restoration screen display processing is ended, and if there is reception of the specifying command after releasing the special winning opening (S90627; Y), the special winning opening The display of the notification image during opening is ended, and the process proceeds to S90630 (S90628).

  Then, at S90629, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not any of the symbol determination command or the hit end designation command has been received. If there is reception of either the symbol determination command or the hit end designation command (S90629; Y), the recovery screen display process timer is cleared, the display of the power failure recovery screen is ended, and the power failure recovery screen display processing is ended. Do. If neither the symbol determination command nor the end designation command has been received (S90629; N), the power failure recovery screen display process is ended without executing S90630.

  That is, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 supplies power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 due to the occurrence of an error such as radio wave error, magnet error, vibration detection error or the like mentioned above during the game. If it is stopped (power is turned off) and power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed (the power is turned on) without operating the clear switch, power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped. If the gaming state at the time of the play is the normal state, the left display failure recovery screen is displayed on the effect display device 905. Then, when the reception of the symbol determination command, that is, the variation of the special symbol stops, the effect control CPU 90120 ends the display of the left-turn power failure recovery screen.

  In addition, when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed (the power is turned on) without operating the clear switch, the gaming state at the time of stopping the supply of the power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the gaming ball If it is a gaming state (time reduction state, big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state) to launch the game to the right gaming area 9010 R, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a right-turn power failure recovery screen on the effect display device 905. Then, the symbol determination command, the big winning opening open designated command, the hit ending designated command reception, that is, the fluctuation stop of the special symbol, the closing of the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening, the big hit gaming state or the small hitting game When transitioning from the state to the time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 ends the display of the power-on-the-wire restoration screen for right-handed use.

  Furthermore, when the large winning opening open command is received during display of the right-handed power failure recovery screen, that is, when the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in the large hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state The effect control CPU 90120 displays a notification image showing the special winning opening open on the effect display device 905, and informs the player that the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening is open. As described above, in this embodiment, even when the power failure recovery screen is displayed during the big hit game or the small hit game, the notification image is displayed on the effect display device 905 while the big winning opening is open. Since the game ball can be urged to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 9010 R so that the game ball wins the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening, the first big winning in the big hit game The game ball is not won by the game ball does not win the game ball by the game ball does not get to the player by the game ball does not win the game ball by the game ball does not win the game ball by the small hit game It is possible to reduce the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player, such as the possibility that the big hit game will be started (controlled to the big hit game state) without passing through the third count switch 9024B. In other words, the game value in this embodiment is the number of winning balls awarded by the game ball winning in the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening, and after the gaming ball is winning in the second large winning opening It means being controlled to a big hit game state by having passed the 3rd count switch 9024B.

  In this embodiment, the special winning opening open notification image is displayed only during the opening of the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening during display of the right-handed power failure recovery screen, that is, Although the display and non-display of the special winning opening open notification image is repeatedly executed by repeating the opening of the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening, the present invention is limited to this. Instead of the big winning opening open notification image is the end of the opening of the last first big winning opening or second big winning opening in the big hit game or small hit game until the big hit game or small hit game is finished It may be displayed continuously.

  Also, in this embodiment, the special display opening is opened on the effect display device 905 to notify that the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is open during display of the right-handed power failure recovery screen. Although the form which displays a middle information picture was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, and the 1st big winning a prize opening or the 2nd big winning a prize opening is open while the display for right-handed power failure restoration screen is displayed. The notification of the presence may be executed by sound output from the speakers 908 L, 908 R, light emission of the game effect LED 909 or the like in addition to or instead of the display of the image on the effect display device 905.

  Next, FIG. 61 and FIG. 62 show the lighting mode of the right-handed notification LED 9030, the display mode of the right-handed notification image, the display mode of the power failure recovery screen, and the display mode of the big winning opening open notification image in this embodiment. It explains based on it.

  First, the case where the gaming state is the normal state will be described. As shown in FIG. 61A, since the normal state is a gaming state in which the game ball is shot toward the left gaming area 9010L, the right-handed notification LED 9030 is extinguished. As shown in FIG. 61 (B), when an error such as vibration detection 1 error is stopped during the execution of the variable display in the normal state is detected, the pachinko game is operated by the operation of a game clerk etc. The supply of power to the machine 901 is stopped. Then, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started again by an operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, as shown in FIG. A message such as "Please wait for a while" is displayed.

  Next, the case where the gaming state is the time saving state, the small hitting gaming state, and the big hitting gaming state will be described. In this embodiment, the lighting mode of the right hitting notification LED 9030 in the time saving state, the small hitting gaming state, the big hitting gaming state, the display mode of the right hitting notification image, the display mode of the power failure recovery screen, the notification of the big winning opening open Since the display mode of the image is the same, an example in the small hit game state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 62A, the small hit gaming state (and the short time state, the big hit gaming state) is a gaming state in which the game ball is launched toward the right gaming area 9010 R, so the right hitting notification LED 9030 lights up. There is. Further, during the small hit gaming state (and the time saving state, the big hit gaming state), the right-handed notification image is displayed in the first mode in the upper right portion of the effect display device 905.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (B), when an error such as vibration detection 1 error is stopped in the small hit game is detected, the electric power of the pachinko game machine 901 is operated by the operation of the store clerk etc. Supply is stopped. Then, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started again by an operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, as shown in FIG. "Please continue to hit the right" will be displayed.

  It should be noted that while the display for the right-handed power failure recovery screen is displayed, the right-handed notification LED 9030 lights up because the gaming state at the point when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped is the small hitting gaming state. In the upper right portion of the effect display device 905, a right-handed notification image is displayed in the second mode. Then, when the second large winning opening (the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening during the big hit game) is opened while the right-handed power failure restoration screen is displayed, the large winning in the lower part of the effect display device 905 A message such as "the big winning opening is open" is displayed as the notification image during the opening of the mouth.

  In this embodiment, while the game state is a big hit game state and a small hit game state, a common winning opening open notification position image is displayed during display of the right-handed power failure recovery screen. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming state is a big hit gaming state and a small hit gaming state while the right-handed power failure restoration screen is displayed. It is also possible to display a notification image of the big winning opening open of a different aspect.

  In this embodiment, the special winning opening opened during the display of the right-handed power failure restoration screen displays a notification image during the opening of the special winning opening common to the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a mode in which the special winning opening opened during display of the right-handed power failure restoration screen is different between the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening. The notification image may be displayed during opening of the special winning opening of the player so that the player can easily recognize which of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening the game ball should be won.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment, the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed in the gaming state in which the gaming balls such as the time saving state, the big hit gaming state, and the small hit gaming state are launched toward the right gaming area 9010R. Pachinko gaming machine by displaying the right-handed notification image together with the right-handed power failure recovery screen on the effect display device 905 when stopping and resuming the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 without operating the clear switch. When the supply of power is resumed at 901, the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can be reduced by not displaying the game area for firing the game ball on the effect display device 905.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment, the lighting mode of the right-handed notification LED 9030 is controlled from the normal state to the big hit gaming state etc. when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed. The display mode of the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 905 is the same as the case of the first case when the gaming state is controlled from the normal state to the big hit gaming state etc., and to the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the second mode and the second mode when the supply of power is resumed, the player confirms whether the display mode of the right-handed notification image is the first mode or the second mode. By doing this, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in a state where the supply of power is resumed.

  Further, since the effect control CPU 90120 displays the power failure recovery screen and the right-turn notification image on the effect display device 905 based on the reception of the right-touch notification LED lighting specification command from the CPU 90103, the effect display device 905 Since there is no need to provide a dedicated command for designating the start of the display of the power failure recovery screen or a dedicated command for designating the start of the display of the right notification image on the effect display device 905, the number of commands increases. It can be suppressed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, even at timings other than when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the right-handed notification LED lighting designation command and the right-handed notification LED extinguishing designation command finely divide the right-handed notification. The turning on / off of the LED 9030 can be interlocked with the display start / display end of the right-handed notification image.

  Further, the CPU 90103 executes a game control timer interrupt process every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and executes a command control process (S9020) in the game control timer interrupt process, and performs the same interrupt command control process. The power failure recovery specification command and the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command are transmitted to the effect control board 9012 by the disconnection restoration specification command and the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command, so that the power failure recovery in the effect display device 905 The display start timing of the screen and the display start timing of the right-handed notice image can be made the same, and the display start timing of the power failure recovery screen and the display start timing of the right-handed notice image are different. To prevent the occurrence of inconveniences such as the hit notification image being missed by the player It can be.

  Although this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the display start timing of the power failure recovery screen and the display start timing of the right-handed notification image in the effect display device 905 are the same, the present invention is limited to this. Instead of the display start timing of the right-handed notification image, it may be different from the display start timing of the power failure recovery screen if the power failure recovery screen is being displayed.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment is provided with a right-handed display unit 9025D that can notify that the game area to fire the game ball is the right game area 9010R by the lighting control and the extinguishing control by the CPU 90103, Transmits the right turn notification LED turn on command to the effect control board 9012 along with the lighting control of the right turn display unit 9025D, and the effect control board 9012 along with the turn-off control of the right turn display unit 9025D. Since the right-handed notification LED extinguishing designation command is transmitted, the lighting state of the right-handed display unit 9025D and the display state of the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 905 are interlocked with each other. The display of the hit notification image can be appropriately performed.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment can control the first special winning opening in a closed state where the gaming ball can not win and an open state where the gaming ball can win the first special variable winning ball device 907A. And a second special variable winning ball device 907B capable of controlling the second big winning opening in a closed state in which the gaming ball can not win a prize and an open state in which the gaming ball can win a prize; And the second ball winning prize processing (S9012) which gives a winning ball based on the winning of the game ball in the second big winning opening, and the gaming ball won the second big winning hole during the small hit game The gaming state can be controlled to the big hit gaming state based on passing through the third count switch 9024B. Then, in the effect display device 905, since the notification image is displayed while the big winning opening is open based on the opening of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening, the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 901 When reopened, it is possible for the player to recognize that the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are in an open state in which the game ball can be won, and the first big game ball is not fired. The player's fault such as not being controlled to the big hit gaming state by the fact that the game ball does not get a prize ball in the winning opening or the second big winning hole and the game ball does not pass the third count switch 9024B The generation of profits can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the special winning opening open notification image is displayed on the effect display device 905 based on the opening of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening during display of the power failure recovery screen. The present invention is not limited to this, and if the display of the power failure recovery screen is in a big hit game or a small hit game, the notification image for the big winning opening is the first big winning opening Alternatively, it may be displayed on the effect display device 5 before the second big winning opening is released to make it possible for the player to recognize that the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening is opened.

  Further, in this embodiment, the notification image for the big winning opening is displayed on the effect display device 905 based on the fact that the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are opened while the power failure recovery screen is displayed. Although the present invention has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the display of the power failure recovery screen, even when the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening are opened, the notification image of the large winning opening is open. May not be displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the notification image for the big winning opening is displayed on the effect display device 905 based on the fact that the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are opened while the power failure recovery screen is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the game ball can be won at the second start winning opening during display of the power failure recovery screen (normally variable winning ball device 906B is normally open When changing from the state to the enlarged open state), the effect display device 905 may display an image notifying that the game ball has become available for winning in the second start winning opening. That is, the "variable winning device" of the means 6 in this embodiment may be the first special variable winning ball device 907A or the second special variable winning ball device 907B as in this embodiment, or the second start winning opening. It may be a normally variable winning ball device 906B to be formed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the notification image for the big winning opening is displayed on the effect display device 905 based on the fact that the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are opened while the power failure recovery screen is displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the special winning opening open notification image is either the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening during display of the power failure recovery screen. May be displayed on the effect display device 905 based on the fact that only the key is released.

  In addition, when it is determined that the occurrence of "radio wave error" is an error that has a higher priority than the "magnet error" that is triggered to be controlled to the game stop state after entering the game stop state. As described above, since the process of S90414 is not executed, that is, the output of the security signal corresponding to the "radio wave error" whose occurrence has been determined is limited, the security signal corresponding to the "magnet error" being output Does not change (ON / OFF of the signal), and it becomes difficult to confirm an error (abnormality) that triggered the output of these security signals on the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, a hall computer etc. Can be prevented.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions may be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. Be

  For example, in the above embodiment, when the supply of power is resumed, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the effect display device 905 to display a power failure recovery screen (on the basis of the reception of the right turn notification LED lighting specification command from the CPU 90103). Although the mode for displaying the right-handed power failure recovery screen and the right-handed notification image is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 90120 restarts the supply of power. The power failure recovery screen (right-handed power failure recovery screen) and the right-handed notification image may be displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the reception of the game state designation command according to the gaming state from the CPU 90103. By doing this, it is not necessary to provide an individual command for displaying the right-handed notice image on the effect display device 905, and an increase in the number of commands can be suppressed.

  Specifically, Modification 1 will be described based on FIGS. 63 to 65. FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 63, in the game control main processing in the present modification 1, the CPU 90103 executes the processing of Sa901 to Sa908 and Sa9041 to Sa9044, and then the gaming state according to the gaming state specified in the processing of Sa9044. The transmission setting of the designated command is performed (Sa 9046 a), and the processing of Sa 9048 and Sa 9015 to Sa 9020 is executed. Note that the gaming state designation command transmitted and set in Sa 46 a is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 by the command control process (S 20).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64, when the effect control CPU 90120 executes S90701 to S90703 and determines in S90703 that there is reception of the power failure recovery designating command, the gaming state designating command is received together with the power recovery designating command. The game state is specified (S90707a). Then, it is determined whether or not the specified gaming state is the normal state (S90707 b), and if the specified gaming state is any of the short time state, the big hit gaming state, and the small hit gaming state (S90707 b; N), The processes in S90708 and S90709 are executed to turn on the right-handed notification LED 9030 and start displaying the right-handed notification image of the first aspect on the effect display device 905.

  When the gaming state changes from the normal state to the big hit gaming state or the like by the CPU 90103 executing the special symbol process processing, the effect control CPU 90120 is received from the CPU 90103 as shown in the processing of S90704 a to S90704 c. The game state is specified from the game state specification command, and if the specified game state is not the normal state, that is, if it is a big hit game state, S90705 and S90706 are executed to turn on the right-handed notification LED 9030 and the effect display device 905 The display of the right-handed notification image of the first aspect of the present invention may be started. Then, if it is determined that the right-handed notification image is being displayed in the first mode in S90702 (S90702; Y), the effect control CPU 90120 receives the gaming state received from the CPU 90103 as shown in the processing of S90710a to S90710c. The game state is specified from the designated command, and if the specified game state is the normal state, S90708 and S90709 are executed to turn off the right-handed notification LED 9030 and the right-handed notification image of the first aspect in the effect display device 905 The display of should be finished.

  As described above, in the first modification, there is no need to provide an individual command for displaying the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 905, thereby suppressing an increase in the number of commands while controlling the gaming state according to the gaming state. The display of the power failure recovery screen and the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 905 can be realized in detail by the designated command.

  In the first modification, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the CPU 90103 transmits a game state designation command according to the game state to the effect control board 9012 (effect control CPU 90120), The effect control CPU 90120 exemplifies a mode in which the right-turn notification image is displayed on the effect display device 905 together with the power failure recovery screen according to the game state specified from the game state designating command received from the CPU 90103. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the CPU 90103 transmits a power failure recovery designation command according to the gaming state to the effect control board 9012 (effect control CPU 90120), The effect control CPU 90120 receives the power failure recovery designation command received from the CPU 90103 With power interruption recovery screen effect display device 905 according to al specified game state may be displayed right-handed notification image.

  In the above embodiment, the big hit game is executed while the display of the big hit game effect is executed in the effect display device 905. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the big hit game effect, Not only the effect of 1 but a plurality of effects may be executable. When a plurality of effects can be executed as a big hit game effect, the player may select an effect to be executed during the big hit game by operating the push button 9031 B or the stick controller 9031 A.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the player can select the effect to be executed during the big hit game by the operation of the push button 9031 B or the stick controller 9031 A as described above, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 901 during selection of the effect. When the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed when the pachinko game machine 901 is stopped, the processing of the CPU 90120 for effect control can be reduced by executing a predetermined effect of 1 as a big hit game effect. May be

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (A) to FIG. 66 (E) as the second modification, the effect control CPU 90120 is derived and displayed in a combination showing the effect symbol is a big hit, and then the first round of the big hit game The options of BGM (music) output from the speakers 908L and 908R as a big hit game effect during the big hit game are displayed in the big hit game (options for song A, song B, and song C shown in FIG. 66 (B)).

  In the screen shown in FIG. 66 (B), the player or the like selects any one of the options by the operation of the push button 9031B or the stick controller 9031A and performs the determination operation. When the display ends, the effect display device 905 displays an image as a big hit game effect, and BGM corresponding to the determined option is output from the speakers 908L and 908R.

  On the other hand, in the state where it is not determined which BGM to output yet, that is, when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped while the BGM option is displayed, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is powered again. When it is turned on, the right-handed power failure restoration screen and the right-handed notification image are displayed in the effect display device 905 as in the previous embodiment.

  Then, when the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is closed and the first round is finished, the effect control CPU 90120 displays an image as a big hit game effect on the effect display device 905, as shown in FIG. Among the options displayed in), one BGM (the song C in the present modification 2) is determined as the BGM output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the output from the speakers 908L and 908R of the determined BGM is started.

  In the second modification, when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped while the option of BGM is displayed, the supply of the power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, and then from the speakers 908L and 908R. Although the form which determines BGM to output uniquely was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, When the supply of the power to the pachinko game machine 901 is stopped during the display of the option of BGM, After the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the BGM output from the speakers 908L and 908R may be randomly determined from among the displayed options.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the effect display device 905 is right based on the fact that the game state is controlled to the game state in which the game balls such as the short time state, the big hit game state, and the small hit game state are launched toward the right game area 9010R. Although the hit notification image is displayed to prompt the player to hit the game ball toward the right gaming area 9010R, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming state is the normal state, that is, When the gaming state is controlled to launch the gaming ball toward the left gaming area 9010L, the effect control CPU 90120 displays an effect display based on detection that the gaming ball has been launched toward the right gaming area 9010R. Direct the game ball to the left game area 9010 L by the display on the device 905, the sound output by the speakers 908 L, 908 R, the light emission of the game effect LED 909, etc. It may be a warning notification to give blood. In this manner, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 that warns and warns that the game ball should be launched to the left game area 9010 L based on the detection that the game ball has been launched to the right game area 9010 R. If the rendering symbol is derived and displayed as a change display result indicating a big hit or a small hit during execution of the warning notification, the warning notification may be stopped.

  In the embodiment, when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the CPU 90103 receives a power failure recovery designation command and an LED for right-handed notification when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed. Although a mode in which the power failure recovery screen and the right-handed notification image are displayed on the effect display device 905 by transmitting the lighting specification command to the effect control board 9012 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. A storage unit capable of storing at least a part of the process being executed by the effect control CPU 90120 when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped is provided on the effect control board 9012 to the pachinko gaming machine 901 When the power supply to the device is resumed, no reception from the CPU 90103 such as a power failure recovery specification command or a right-handed LED lighting specification command Performance display device 905 may be capable of displaying the power interruption recovery screen and right-handed notification image on the basis of the contents of the stored in the storage unit.

  In the above embodiment, the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are provided in the right gaming area 9010R so that only the game balls flowing down the right gaming area 9010R can be won, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and the first large winning opening and the second winning opening may be provided at positions where it is possible to win a game ball flowing down the left gaming area 9010L. In this case, when the first big winning opening and the second winning opening are provided at positions where the game balls flowing down the left gaming area 9010 L can win, a pachinko gaming machine 901 during a big hit game or a small hit game. When the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped and the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the game display ball is directed to the left game area 9010 L together with the left-turn power failure recovery screen on the effect display device 905 A left strike notification image may be displayed prompting to launch. In other words, the “specific route” in the present invention is a route in which the special winning opening that is open when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed regardless of the right and left of the game area. Just do it.

  Furthermore, if it is an area where it is possible to launch a game ball, the right game area 9010 R such as the upper part of the center decoration frame surrounding the periphery of the effect display device 905 and the left game It may be provided in an area other than the area 9010L. As described above, when the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening are provided in the area other than the right gaming area 9010R and the left gaming area 9010L, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is used during the big hit and small hit games. When the supply is stopped and the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the effect display device 905 is provided with the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (for example, the center A notification image may be displayed prompting the user to shoot toward the top of the decoration frame or the like.

  In the above embodiment, when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped and the supply of the power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed during the hit game or the small hit game, for right-handed notification Although the embodiment in which the LED 9030 and the right-handed display portion 9025D are lit is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped during the hit game or the small hit game. When the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the right-handed notification LED 9030 may not be turned on. Further, the right-handed notification LED 9030 and the right-handed display portion 9025D in the above-described embodiment are omitted, and a promotion display is provided to promote firing of the game medium so as to flow down the specific route on the effect display device 905. It is also good. Further, instead of the notification by the right-handed notification LED 9030 and the right-handed display unit 9025D in the embodiment, notification may be performed by audio output by the speakers 908L, 908R or the like.

  In the embodiment, the CPU 90103 controls lighting and extinguishing of the right-handed display unit 9025D, and the effect control CPU 90120 controls lighting and extinguishing of the right-handed notification LED 9030. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. There is no limitation, and the CPU 90103 may control both turning on and off the right-handed display unit 9025D and the right-handed notification LED 9030.

  Further, although the pachinko game machine 901 is illustrated as an example of a game machine in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is the inside of the game machine In addition, the number of balls that have been enclosed so as to be able to circulate and is lent out in response to a player's request for lending, and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winnings are added, while the number of gaming balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines that are stored. In these enclosed game machines, not the gaming balls but points or points are awarded to the player, so the points or points given are the game values.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the CPU for effect control 90120 of a variation pattern indicating a variation mode such as a variation time and a type of reach effect, an example of transmitting one variation pattern specification command when starting a variation Although shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the CPU for effect control 90120 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the CPU 90103 uses, for example, the first command to change time or a change mode before reaching reach (before reaching a so-called second stop when not reaching reach). The second command indicates the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode after reaching the reach (after reaching a so-called second stop if not reaching), such as the type of reach and the presence of re-lottery effect. The command may be transmitted, or only the fluctuation time may be notified by the first command and the second command, and the effect control CPU 90120 may be used for the specific fluctuation mode executed at each timing. The selection may be made by When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending the first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. As described above, by notifying a change pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which must be stored as a change pattern specification command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, although the game ball is shot out from below the game area by the ball striking device, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ball striking device may be pachinko game machine 901 The game ball may be launched from the upper position of the game area by providing the game ball at the upper position of the game area.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment has illustrated the form which made the starting winning opening two in 1st starting winning opening and 2nd starting winning opening, this invention is not limited to this, and starting winning opening The number of start winning openings may be three or more.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which made the special symbol two in 1st special figure and 2nd special figure is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, Only one special symbol is one It is good also as three or more special symbols.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B respectively variably display a plurality of types of special symbols including the final stop symbol as a display result, and then stop the final stop symbol. Although the present invention is not limited to this, after displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner without including the final stop symbol as a display result, the final stop symbol is displayed in a stopped state. It may be That is, the final stop symbol to be the display result may be a symbol different from the special symbol used for the variable display.

  Further, although the embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the time-saving control is carried out after the end of the big hit game (playing state is controlled to the short state state), the present invention is not limited to this. A jackpot type may be provided in which probability fluctuation control is performed such that the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is increased after the end of the jackpot game. In the pachinko gaming machine 901 capable of performing probability variation control, probability variation control may be performed after the end of the big hit game based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed the third count switch 9023B during the big hit game.

  1 pachinko game machine, 87 V judgment winning device, 870 V pay area, 100 effect control microcomputer, 95 V pay aura image, 560 game control microcomputer, 55 RAM, 901 pachinko game machine, 904A 1st special symbol display Unit, 904B second special symbol display, 905 effect display device, 9025D right-handed display unit, 9030 right-handed notification LED, 90103 CPU, 90120 CPU for effect control.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling it to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Variable winning means capable of entering gaming media in a predetermined state;
A specific area provided in the variable winning means and to which game media can enter;
First state control means for controlling to an advantageous state based on the variable display result;
Based on the variable display result, control is made to the predetermined state, and the gaming medium can enter the specific area in the variable winning means, and based on the gaming medium entering the specific area in the predetermined state Second state control means for controlling to said advantageous state;
And a predetermined effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the game medium entering the specific area in the predetermined state.
The predetermined state ends when a predetermined period has elapsed or when a predetermined number of game media have entered the variable winning means.
The predetermined effect means changes the effect mode of the predetermined effect according to the number of game media entering the variable winning means after the game medium enters the specific area.
further,
Launching means capable of launching a game medium based on the operation of the player;
A first control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing recovery processing of the gaming state when receiving the power supply after stopping the power supply;
A display means capable of displaying a promotion display for promoting firing of the game medium so as to flow down a specific one of the flow paths through which the game medium flows, and a display means capable of displaying a recovery display related to the recovery process.
A means different from the display means, wherein the notification means is capable of promoting notification to promote firing of the game medium so as to flow down the specific path;
Second control means for controlling display on the display means based on the information transmitted from the first control means;
Equipped with
A game machine, wherein the second control means can control to display the promotion display together with the recovery display.